VF160EX - Enregistreur audio numérique FOSTEX - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 7.0/10 📄 158 pages PDF ⬇️ EN 💬 AI Question 🖨️ Print

USER MANUAL VF160EX FOSTEX

Operation Manual FOSTEX

1. Read Instructions - Allthe safety and operating instructions

should be read before the appliance is operated.

2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3. Heed Wamings - All wamings on the appliance and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should

5. Water and Moisture - The appliance should not be used near

water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like.

6. Carts and Stands - The appliance should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overtum.

7. Wallor Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to

a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

8. Ventilation - The appliance should be situated so thatits location

or position dose notinterfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinetthat may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings.

9. Heat-The appliance should be situated away from heatsources

such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances {including ampliiers) that produce heat. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION:

POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE

LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU" AU FOND. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage" within the products enclosure that may be ofsufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance

Power Sources - The appliance should be connected to a power supply only ofthe type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the appliance Grounding or P olarization - The precautions that should be taken so thatthe grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed so thatthey are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or againstthem, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Cleaning - The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer.

14. Nonuse Periods - The power cord ofthe appliance should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.

16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when: A. The power supply cord orthe plug has been damaged; or B._ Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance: or C.. The appliance has been exposed to rain: or D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally or exhibits_ a marked change in performance: or E. The appliance has been dropped, orthe enclosure damaged.

17. Servicing - The user should not attemptto service the appliance

beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

18. The appliance should be situated away from drops of water or

spray of water. Objects containing liquid such as vase must not be put on the appliance. , The appliance is not completely isolated from the power supply even ffthe power switch is at off position

About power supply Be sure to connect the VF160EX to the power supply specified in the Specifications section of this owner”s manual. Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage. Do not connect the VF160EX to the same AC outlet towhich devices that could generate noise (such as a large motor or dimmer), or the devices that consume a large amount of power (such as an air conditioning system or large electric heater) are connected. If you use the VF160EX in an area with a different power voltage, first consult your dealer or the nearest Fostex service station. You can use the VF160EX with a power frequency of 50HZz or 60HZz. Itis very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or damage. In such a case, stop using the VF16O0EX immediately and ask your dealer to repair the cord. To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the VF160EX, avoid contact with water or other liquids, or do not handle the power plug while your hands are wet. To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the VF160EX, do not remove the main unit cover or reach the inside the VF16O0EX. Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects such as pins, accidentally enter the inside of the VF160EX because this may lead to electric shock or damage. Should water enter the inside of the VF160EX, remove the power plug from AC outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station. To prevent damage to the VF160EX, be sure to power on the connected devices first, then turn on the power to the VF1GOEX. When you remove or connect the cables to the input/output connectors on the VF160EX, make sure that the channel faders and volume controls are set to “0.” Before turning the power off to the VF160EX, first quit setup mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped. Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the VF160EX while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will you lose recorded data, but you may damage to the VF1GOEX. Fostex is not responsible for the data lost during operation of the VF160EX. reca Before you change the location of the VF160EX, pack the unit in the shipping carton or an impact-resistant case. Make sure that the VF160EX is kept free from external vibration or impact since the VF1GOEX is very sensitive to vibration. Do not install the VF160EX in locations subject to the following:

• Extremely high or low temperature, or significant changes in temperature. *_ Excessive humidity or dust.
• Excessive changes in power supply voltage. *_ Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking surfaces.
• Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or speaker). If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low temperature to a warm place, or if you use the VF160EX in a room in which the temperature varies significantly during winter, condensation may occur on the hard disk or other parts. In such cases, leave the VF160EX for about an hour in the new location before you turn on the power. Note on repair The VF160EX does not use any parts that user can repair easily. Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station to ask about repairs. Use the packing carton designed for the VF160EX when you transport the VF160EX to the dealer for repair or return. If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack the VF16O0EX completely using shock absorbing materials. Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due to incomplete packaging or caused during transport. About copyrights Itis prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording or video images or audio data for which copyright is possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such as contents, broadcasts, sales, or distribution-any purpose other than for your personal pleasure. About damage Fostex is not responsible for any “direct damage” or “indirect damage” caused by using the VF160EX.

FostexX VFISOS< EN Index for Applications This index is provided for searching the page of the desired application. Please use this together with the “Table of Contents” which follow. lwant to try recording a musical instrument. lwant to listen any number oftimes to playback of a recorded tune. Please read pages 31 and 43. Please read page 69. lwantto partially rerecord a previously recorded performance. lwantto locate to the desired point. Please read page 37. Please read page 34. Iwantto format the hard disc. lwant to exchange tracks. Please read page 23. Please read pages 39 and 76. lwantto copy one section of the tune to another track. lwantto mixdown all recordings on the 16 tracks. Please read page 72. Please read page 42. Iwantto make a multiple number of programs. — —— lwantto simultaneously record analog and digital signals. Please read page 70. Please read page 89. Iwantto control the VF160E X with MIDI. Iwantto know details on the internal effecter. Please read page 90. Please read page 57. Iwantto make an original CD. lwantto store and recall the mixing setting. Please read page 125. — Please read page 61. lwantto digitally record my own selected tunes from CD and MD. Iwant to locate to the head ofthe program while fast winding. Please read page 88. Pleas d page 67. lwantto make a backup ofthe song data. case read page lwant to use the internal compressor. Please read page 106. lwantto use the condenser type microphone. Please read pageS 54 and 148. Iwantto send a signal to an external effector. Please read page 147. Iwantto use the equalizer at recording. Please read page 53. Iwant to search the point by digital scrubbing. Please read pages 40 and 51. Iwant to use the internal effector at recording. Please read page 67. Please read pages 41, 50 and 56.

lwantto change the speed at playback/record. Please read page 68. Iwant to locate to a point previous to the desired point. Please read page 137. lwantto manage the programs by naming them. Please read page 71. lwant to operate the faders in pairs. Please read page 146. lwant to operate the “Chain play mode”. Please read page 95. lwantto make a tempo map. Please read pages 133 and 135. lwant to operate the “audio CD playback mode”. Please read page 103. Iwantto mixdown without using external equipment. Please read page 79. lwant to use the CD-R/RW drive, Please read pages 112 - 131. lwantto setup the MTC offset time. Please read page 138. lwant to erase a tune. Please read page 75. lwantto sync with external equipment. Please read page 90-94. Iwant to record in time with the metronome sound. Please read page 87. Iwant to mix record the track playback sound and a newly performed tune. Please read page 85. Iwant to output a MIDI sync signal to external MIDI equipment. Please read page 137. want to ascertain the hard disk format information. Please read page 144. lwantto make a ping-pong recording. Please read page 86. lwant to exchange the hard disk. Please read page 24. lwant to apply protect on a recorded program. Please read page 140. lwantto make event map of the scenes. Please read page 64. Iwant to use the recorded sound in the computer. Please read page 120. Iwant to ascertain the recording functions ofVF160E X. Please read page 9. lwantto setup PAN. Please read pages 40 and 50. Iwant to operate the “Adat Mixer Mode”. Please read page 95. lwant to delete an unnecessary program. Please read page 71.

FOSt&X VAFISOS< ble of Conten Introduction ProductFeatures . Before Operating + Two RECORDING Mode + ADDITIONAL TRACK + INPUT Monitoring and PLAYBACK Monitoring e EVENT. + TRIM + FADER. + [CHSTATUS/CHSEL] ke: + TIMEBASE.. Names and Functions …. + Top Panel (Analog Input/Output Section) + Top Panel (Mixer Section) + Top Panel (Recorder Section) + Top Panel (Display Section) + Rear Panel. + Front Panel … Aboutthe hard disk storage device

• Reformatting the hard dis < Replacing a hard disk + Formatting the new hard di hapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback Aboutdemonstration song!. Connections ofPeripheral Equipment. LCD + Menu shown when turning power ON + Switchingthe Time Base + Switching with [DISP SEL] ke Instructions for DIRECT Record. + Recording to One Track
• Recording to Two Track: LocateFunction + ABS Locate. + Locating a mark point using a Memory and Mark key Saving on the Memory key and Mark key. Direct Location of Memory key or Mark key. Changing the Time Saved in the Memory key and Mark key . + Locating an event memory . Creatinganevent memory Viewingthe event memorié Locate by specifying the event memory. Skiplocate Punchin/Out.. + Manual Punch In/Out .. + Punch In/Outwith Foot switch . *Auto Punch In/Out Programming the PUNC Auto PunchIn/Outtake Auto PunchIn/Outrehears: TrackExchange… + Instructions. Mixing … + Level Adjustmen! + PAN Adjustment . < Equalizer Adjustment + Effect Send Level Adjustment + Modifying Effect Type … Mix Down + Analog Mix Down + Digital Mix Down Instructions to Record with BUSS RECORD < Recording the “H” Input Signal to Track 1 < Recording 8 INPUTS to Tracks 7 and 8.

Chapter 3 Advanced Mixer Operations

Initial condition when the poweris turned on … Operation while the Normal Display is shown …. + Fader + Channel mute and Solo function . + Master channel mute … + Adat Mixer Mode (Input monitoring of all tracks) . Channel ParameterE dit. + Adjusting PAN. < Adjusting EQ. + Controlling Effect send level + Selecting pre/post of Effect sent + Controlling AUX SEND level + Selecting pre/post of AUX sends + Controlling fader levels + Setting the compressor + Channel view... EffectE ditMode + About the effect types + Selecting the effect typ. + Effect parameter settings + Effect parameter details Scene Memory. + Storing to a scene memory < Recalling a scene memory + Level adjust ader adjust . + Direct recall of a scene memory + Clearing a scene memory SceneEventMap . + Creatingan event memory + Creating the scene event map + Deleting an event memory . + Scene sequence mode on/off selection < Executing the scene sequence

Chapter 6 Save/Load of Song Data

Save/load ofsong datausingtheS/PDIF oradatdigital Signal..107 + Saving datausingtheS/P DIF or adat digital signal . + Loading data using theS/P DIF or adat digital sign: Save/Loadusing CD-RW/CD-R … + Saving data using a CD-R/RW drive (Backup) Carring out “full erasure”. + Loading backup data from a CD-R/RW driv Save/Load ofWAV files using a CD-R/CD-RW drive... + Saving a WAV file + Loading a WAV fil Save/Load operating in the CD-DA format + Making an audio CD … + Loading from an audio CD

Chapter 7 SETUP Mode

FOSteX VAISOS< EE Cha 1 Basic Features ofVF160EX Introduction Congratulations! You have chosen a truly unique multitracking device. The VF160EX Fostex Digital Multitracker features a myriad of high-tech functions. These include a digital mixer incorporates high-performance DSP multi-effect made possible using the Fostex-original A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing) technology, as well as an integrated 16-track (+8 additional tracks) digital recorder that can record or play uncompressed 44.1kHz/16 bit high quality sound. Please read the entire User’s Manual to ensure safe and proper use of your recorder. ProductFeatures Mixer Section + Standard high performance DSP multi-effects with A.S.P. Fostex Advanced Signal Processing technology. Intuitive control of all signals with 16-input and stereo master fader. Allinput channels come with channel ON/OFF switch, 3-band equalizer, PRE/POST switchable 2-channel EFF/AUX send. + All 8 channel analog inputs come with built-in trim. Mic to line level compatibility. + Analog channel input 7 and 8 come with phones connector and XLR connector for phantom power. Built-in insert terminals. 2 Record Assigns: DIRECT Rec to simultaneously record 8 analog channels and REC BUS Rec for ping- pong recording. 16-track simultaneous recording of adat digital signals in DIRECT Rec. ° Built-in Scene Memory function to set fader/effect setting and to program/search up to a maximum of 99 mixer modes. + Output mixed-down signals as S/P DIF digital signals and digital record with DAT and other external digital recorders. + You can mixdown within the VF160EX itself by utilizing the internal mixdown mode. In addition, a CD of the mixdown can be recorded. ° Using the built-in CD-R/RW drive, you can burn an audio CD from internally mastered songs. Recorder Section + Employs the FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3) Fostex format. 16-track (plus 8 additional tracks) REC/PLAY with high quality uncompressed 16 bit/44.1kHz sound. Roughly 3 hour recording per 1GB in mono-track. ° Nondestructive voice editing of copy/paste, move/ paste, erase, and undo/redo features as expected from a digital recorder. PROGRAM feature names musical pieces and manage up to a maximum of 99 titles. e +/-6% pitch control. e CDS/P DIF or adat digital signal direct digital recording. Auto punch IN/OUT with rehearsal function set in 1/100 frame units. Foot switch for manual punch IN/OUT. + The chain play function allows continuous playback of desired programs. Audio CD playback is possible. You can play back audio CDs created by the VFIGOEX (or commercially available audio CDs) using the built-in CD-R/RW drive. Others ° Dot matrix LCD and auto-illuminating keys. Graphic display of mixer and recorder settings/ modes. °_3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk compatibility. e You can save/load sata, as well as WAV files, to/from CD-RW or CD-R discs. Save/load to S/P DIF or adat digital signal. MIDI clock and song position pointer and MTC (MIDI Time Code) output. + MMC (MIDI Machine Control). e Slave program (run) from external MTC input. Internal metronome function to rhythm guide recordings. Bar/beat edit (cut off clock) with bar/beat resolution. Six editing memory points and 7 marked points. + 0-10 second pre-roll time settings.

EEE V'FISOE< FOSteX Before Operating This section defines the contents, names and terms the user should know prior to actually operating the VF16OEX. Please read the overview before going any farther with your new recorder as it will save you a lot of time in the long run. 0 RECORDING Modes The VF160EX has 2 recording modes, called REC ASSIGN. DIRECT Recording The first recording mode is the DIRECT REC mode. This recording mode is mainly used to:

• Record signals that are not processed and input in A to H; and

• Simultaneously record all signals input in A to H on separate tracks. In this mode, the signals input in A to H are gain tuned with the TRIM knob, then directly sent to the recorder track. The tracks are recorded as shown at the input terminal. The A input signals are recorded on track 1/

9. Similarly, the B input signals are recorded on track

2/10 and finally the H input signals are recorded on track 8/16. Therefore, it is possible to easily record on all tracks by simply tuning the gain with the TRIM knob. Note that the same signals are sent to tracks 1/9 to 8/

16. Therefore, when 16 tracks are simultaneously

recorded, two tracks of the same sound will each be created. In other words, only a maximum of 8 tracks can be simultaneously recorded with different sounds for input signals A to H. By using the adat digital input it becomes possible to simultaneously record different sounds on 16 tracks. INPUT TRIM RECORDER 1-16 Track BUSS Recording The second recording mode is the BUSS REC mode. This recording mode is mainly used to: *_ Record sounds while applying equalizer and built-in effects; and

• Record (ping-pong recording, etc.) signals mixed on multiple channels on two or one track. This mode is used to record signals sent to the REC BUSS, that is the recording buss, after the input signal or track play sound is processed through the mixer and level tuned or equalized. Built-in effect signals can also be sent to the REC BUSS, therefore, sounds applied with an effect can also be recorded. The channels sent to REC BUSS are called SOURCE. The REC BUSS comes with L/R 2-channels, therefore, it is possible to simultaneously BUSS REC either 2 or 1 track. Playback sound Playback sound LE mp£ inputsignal LE

1-16 Track LR Mix and record to 1 or 2 tracks

FOSteX VAISOS< EE Regardless of whether executing DIRECT or BUSS re- cording, you must select recording sources and record- ing tracks. You can select them using the following keys, depend- ing on the recording mode (DIRECT or BUSS) you are using. LINPUT SEL] key

IBUSS-SOURCE] key IDIRECT REC TRK]key IBUSS-REC TRK]key For DIRECT recording: [INPUT SEL] and [DIRECT REC TRK] keys are used. *[INPUT SEL]key The [INPUT SEL] key is used to select the channel sources be- tween the recorder's output signals (TRACK) and input sig- nals (INPUT). Pressing the [INPUT SEL] key displays the input select screen. Initially, after turning on the VFL60EX power (power on de- fault), this screen looks as below, in which all channel sources are set to recorder's output signals. For DIRECT recording, without changing the setting of the screen above, press the [DIRECT REC TRK] key and specify the recording tracks. This setting is also used for track bouncing via the BUSS recording mode. [DIRECT REC TRK]key After confirming the input selection by pressing the [INPUT SEL]key, press the [DIRECT REC TRK] key to bring up the track selection screen. The following figure shows that no tracks (1 through 16) are armed. To arm selected tracks, press the ap- propriate [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys The following figure shows that track 1 is armed (READY), so that input A signal can be recorded on track

For BUSS recording: INPUT SEL], [BUSS-SOURCE] and [BUSS-REC TRK] keys are used. *[INPUT SEL]key To make "BUSS recording" of input signals, press SEL]key and set source signals to inputs by pre STATUS/CH SEL] keys of channels 9 through 16. he [INPUT ng the [CH In the following figure, the source for channel 16 is set to input

SELECT INPUT ÉTRACK | ! Tips: Pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of channel 9-16 while holding down the [SHIFT] key switches channel sources for all tracks 9 through 16 between "IN" (in- put A through H) and "TRK" simultaneously. S J ÆBUSS SOURCE] key The [BUSS SOURCE] key is used to select source channels for BUSS recording. If you press the [BUSS SOURCE] key when the input select screen is set as the figure shown above (i.e. the source for channel 16 is set to input H), the source select screen as below appears. While this screen is shown, you can select the desired source channel(s) for BUSS recording by pressing the appro- priate [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key(s). ng the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of channel 1-8 (or channel 9-16) while holding down the [SHIFT] key itches arms all tracks 1 through 8 (or 9 through 16) simultaneously.

Tips: Pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of channel 1-8 (or channel 9-16) while holding down the [SHIFT] key sets all channels 1 through 8 (or 9 through 16) to recording sources simultaneously.

EEE V'FISOE< FOSteX In the following example, channel 16 which accepts input H is selected as a source channel.

She If you select channels 1 through 4 and 16 here, tracks 1 through 4 and input H are set as recording sources. Therefore, you can record mixed signals of track and input signals. If you also select "EEF1" or "EFF2", you can record source signals with internal effect. To bounce tracks, set all channel sources to "TRK" using the "SELECT INPUT/TRACK" and set source channel for recording as shown in the following fig- ure. Then set tracks 15 and 16 as the recording tracks (see "IBUSS-REC TRK] key" below).

SRÈ SRC SRC SRC SRC SAC

*[BUSS-REC TRK]key The IBUSS-REC TRK] key is used to select "recording tracks" for BUSS recording. After setting the recording source(s) as described above, press the IBUSS-REC TRK] key to bring up the screen such as below, so that you can select recording tracks for BUSS recording.

Q Q 1Ù 12 13 14 IS H L In the following example, channel 16 which accepts input H, is set as a source channel for BUSS recording to track 1. You can select a mono or à pair of odd/even tracks as the BUSS recording track(s). Note that you cannot select a track whose number corresponds to a source channel as the recording track.

RECORDING Syste Unlike conventional systems, the VF160EX records on a hard disk storage device, instead of cassette tape. Sound source recording can Start from any point on a formatted disk, as long as the point is within a 24 hour time range in ABS time. Note that it is also possible to move (locate) to any point within that time range, as well. Just think of the VFL60EX as coming with a tape that is pre-programmed with a 24 hour counter. REC END 15m 00 23h 50m 59

You can record at any point wii 24 hours in ABS me. 1 The REC time of cassette tape type recorders vary according to the REC time of the tape. Recording with the VFIGOEX is more efficient since unrecorded areas of the disk are not used although the REC time is not unlimited. 24 hour recording

PROGRAM You can use up to à maximum of 99 “24-hour time counted tapes” with the VFL6OEX. This tape is called a “Program”. Note that a program exists individually on the hard disk. Therefore, each respective program can be freely recorded, played and edited without affecting other programs. A program can be named with a program title, making it easier to identify and file the musical piece. In the usual menu, the Program appears on the LCD as shown in the following Figure. unrecorded 5 minute recording 5 minute recording

DR career PG1:#4901 Program: PO1 Title: #0001

REMAIN Indicato The REMAIN indicator shows how much recording time is left on hard disk in use. The VFL60EX is controlled with a 24-hour clocked program. Note that the REC time varies according to how much space there is left on the hard disk. By switching the LCD, the VF160EX remain display appears in the following manner, as shown in the figure below. The rough recordable time is on the hard disk is computed in terms of a mono-track basis. The value indicates the available recordable time and disk space when recording one mono track. MaSt RemainTime Hard disk space FIRE 3h07m 1,000MB=1GB

FOSteX VAISOS< EE A mono-track refers to one track. Therefore, a mono-track REMAIN time is the recordable length on the hard disk space available when recording only one track. It is possible to compute the recordable time by dividing the REMAIN time with the number of tracks to record. Therefore, if four tracks are simultaneously recorded, then the recordable time is 46 minutes (3 hours 7 minutes divided by 4). If eight tracks are simultaneously recorded then the recordable time is 23 minutes (divided by 8), and for sixteen tracks the recordable time would be 12 minutes (divided by 16). The VF160EX manages up to 99 programs on the hard disk. Note that the space on the hard disk is slightly reduced as the number of programs increase, since each program contains various settings, in addition to the REC data. Therefore, it is important to always check the REMAIN time left prior to starting the recording, to ensure that you have enough hard disk space to work with. A shortage of hard disk space will stop the recording. CHANNEL andTRACK According to this manual, “channel” refers to mixer items and “track” refers to recorder items. For example, a sentence may read as follows. “One track of recorder play music will be started on the channel 1 fader of the mixer.” “Eight channels worth of signals from input A to H will be recorded on tracks 7 and 8 of the recorder.” ADDITIONALTRACK One program on the VF160EX consists of 24 tracks. The user can record, play and edit Tracks 1-16. There are also 8 additional tracks (17-24). These 24 tracks can be alternately exchanged in one track, two track (stereo pair) or an 8 track block. This is called track exchange. This makes it possible to record solo parts on several tracks, exchange the parts and compare the results. The rhythm section recorded on multiple tracks can also be completely exchanged and remixed with this feature, which is a convenience in numerous ways. Note that tracks 17-24 cannot be recorded, played or edited. They must be exchanged with tracks 1-16 to execute these features. One track exchange Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 : 2 track block exchange track block exchange

INPUT Monitoring and PLAYBACK Monitoring There are two ways to monitor the signal output (track sound) from each track with the VF160EX recorder: input monitoring and playback monitoring. Playback monitoring means that the track output is the sound thatis played. This feature is generally used to playback and listen to sounds that have already been recorded. Playback monitoring is generally used to playback sound. Input monitoring means the signals (sounds to be recorded) input on that track are directly sent to the track output. This feature is used to check the REC level of the sound to record. Therefore, tracks that are able to be input monitored are either in the “READY” or recording state. Signal input in the recorder Signal output from the recorder Luack Pleyback sound (Playback monitor) input signal {input monitor) 3track À Playback sound (Playback monitor) Atrack Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Input signal (input manitor) Input signal (input monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) À Playback sound (Playback monitor) À Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) Playback sound (Playback monitor) (LILI EVEN When recording with the VF160EX, an independent audio file for each recording is respectively created on the tracks recorded. Remember that silence is also recognized as one O file. These audio files and 0 (silent) files are called an “events”. A total of 512 events can be created for each track with the VF160EX. An excess of 512 events cannot be recorded. It is rare that this happens in normal use. The VF160EX is also complete with the function to indicate the current number of events. An alarm will sound when exceeding the maximum number of events authorized. This problem can be resolved by saving or loading the program (procedures described later) in such case, The following are specific examples of the number of events. A. The VF160EX counts the silent portion of a silenttrack, which is counted as one file, but not recorded with any sound. Therefore, this means that there will be one file on the track. B. One audio file is created when recording sound on a track. Therefore, this means thatthere will be two files on the track. C. A new audio file is created when consecutively recording Therefore, this means thatthere will be three files on the track. D. An audio files is created after a O file, when re-recording after fast forward. Therefore, this means thatthere will be five files onthe track. E. When straddling (b) and (c) to record, the track will have four files, and thus, the number of events are reduced.

A Silence 8 [ Reë ] Silence c[ res [| Rec ] Silence D [ RecB [| Recc | Sience [ ReeD [Silence E RecE [Silence [ RecD [Silence TRIM It is important to take care when analog signals input are converted into digital signals (A/D conversion) when recording with the VF160EX. TRIM is used to tune this process and the PEAK LED is used to monitor the process. If the trim gain is too high ([PEAK] LED illuminated) for the analog signals input into [INPUT] A to H, then the signals input will be converted into distorted (clipped) digital signals, which will sound like noise. Once converted with this noise, it is not possible to eliminate this distortion from the sound with the mixer or recorder. Therefore, it is important to tune the [TRIM] to a level where the “[PEAK] LED fluctuates between the illuminating or not” point at the maximum volume of the signal input. Excessive gain Clip level The VF160EX features 16 channel faders and 1 master fader. Among the faders, the faders for channels 1 to 8 are always started up with output signals from the recorder of tracks 1 to 8 (PLAYBACK or INPUT Monitoring) to adjust this level. The master fader is always used to adjust the output level of the stereo output. “Signals input from A to H” or “signals output from the recorder” can be selected as signals to fade and the fade level can be adjusted with faders for channels 9 to 16. This is a way to easily record with the minimum faders along with the earlier mentioned “2 recording modes.” Itis not possible to mix the playback sound of tracks 9 to 16 if inputs A to H are started for all channel faders of 9 to 16. However, this can be prevented, since during normal use, the number of signals input are reduced when recording to tracks 9 to 16 (leaving only the solo part, etc.).

VAISOE< FOstex ICH STATUS/CH SEL] key 1 Channels 1 to 8 Channel Fader À ICH STATUS/CH SEL] key | Channels 9 to 16 Channel Fader Master Fader [CH STATUS/CH SEL]Key The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key is the most important key when operating the VF160EX. The status and contents of operation varies according to selections made with this key. *_ Under normal conditions, the key illuminates or flashes to indicate that the signal is input “INPUT” into the current channel fader, the playback sound “TRACK” is started, or the track is ready to record (READY). Pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key alone switches between on and off (mute) of the corresponding fader. Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key switches between on and off of the solo function. HIS *_ To set the send level to the built-in effect or set the equalizer settings of each channel, press the keys to set each parameter shown in the figure below and then press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the channel to set. Itis possible, for example, to set the PAN of one channel signal when the channel 1 [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key is pressed after pressing the [PAN] key. All channels can be set by pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of channels 1 to 16. *_ When the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key is pressed, the status will require selection of either “INPUT” or “TRACK” for channel faders 9 to 16, as mentioned earlier. Therefore, operate only the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of channels 9 to 16 to switch between “INPUT” or “TRACK,” each time the key is pressed. enr Casa] auaaue

FOSteX VAISOS< EE *_ When pressing the [BUSS-SOURCE] key, the status will require selection of a channel to send to “REC BUSS”, as mentioned earlier. Therefore, the channel in which the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key is pressed is sent to the “REC BUSS”. All channels are selected up to this point. The following two types only select tracks. *_Itis possible to select the track to record (REC READY) in each respective REC mode by pressing the [BUSS-RECTRK] key and [DIRECT-REC TRK] key. TIME BA The term “Time Base” frequently appears in the text of this manual, The time base plays the same role as the “tape counter” of conventional tape recorders, and is used to show the location of the recorder. There are 3 types of time bases: LABS (Absolute Time) indication 2.BAR/BEAT/CLK (Bar, Beat, Clock) indication 3.MTC (MIDITime Code) The user can switch between time bases by pressing the [DISP SEL/TIME BASE] key, while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. An ABS (Absolute Time) base is the “absolute time” of the hard disk. A time base counter between 00H 00M 00S (ABS 0) and 23H 59M 59$ is created when creating a program. According to the following figure, the recorder is located at a O0M (minute) 00$ (second) ABS point. TheH (hour) appears when the ABS exceeds the one hour mark. ABS O is the universal standard point to manage the recorder location, and correlates with other time bases. BAR/BEAT/CLK indicate the “Bar, Beat, Clock” that are created with the tempo map (beat and tempo) ofthe VF160. According to the following figure, the recorder is located at -002BAR (Bar

2) 1BEAT (Beat 1) of the BAR/BEAT/CLK. BAR/BEAT/CLK set

the ABS 0 location as Bar -002 as the offset position. The location of the bar thereafter is determined according to the beat and tempo setting. The default setting of ABS O is set at Bar -002, however, this setting is variable between Bars -009 and -002. MTC set the ABS 0 location to MTC * H** M**S, In other words, MTC sets the time base to start MTC from a certain time, which serves as the offset time, to synchronize the following 24 hour MTC time base with the ABS to count the time. If, for example, ABS O is set to MTC 1H, then MTC starts from 1H and ABS 1H (one hour elapsed) will be MTC 2H. The MTC time set as ABS Ois called the “MTC Offset”. According to the figure below, the current location of the recorder is at MTC 00H (hour), 59M (minutes), 57S (seconds). The default setting of the MTC offset is set to OOH 59M 57S OOF O0SF. This time base can be changed to any 24 hour clock. PH 3 HAT 12345698 AIDNI2IAIMISIB dE LA Itis also possible to change the setting to Bar 001 and Beat 1 of BAR/BEAT/CLK, instead of using the ABS O location point. The following illustrates the relationship between the 3 time bases. ABS 0 com 08 Loou 3 om o6s

*1. All keys on the panel will be indicated with a[ ]around the name in this manual. Example: [PLAY] key, [INPUT] terminal, etc. *2. AI keys that require the [SHIFT] key to be depressed to take effect will be underlined. Example: [EFF EDIT-EFF1/MUTE] key, etc. *3, Channel is represented as “ch” and track as “trk” according to the contents. Example: ch1 fader, trk16, etc.

Fostex VFISOS Top Panel Analog Input/Output Section 1 [INPUT] (Unbalanced)] ack: A to F This adjusts the unbalanced output of the external sound source. Standard Input Level: -50dBV to + 2dBV Connector: Phones jack

2. [INPUT BAL] (Balanced)] ack: G,H

Connect to the balanced output of the external sound source. Standard Input Level: -50dBV to + 2dBV (approx. -48dBu to +4dBu) Connector: XLR-3-31 type (No. 2 Hot) Phantom power (+48V) for condenser mics. This input is disconnected when [INPUT UNBAL] jacks G and H are plugged.

3. [INPUT UNBAL] (Unbalanced)] ack: G,H

Connections with unbalanced output from external sound source. Standard Input Level: -50dBV to + 2dBV Connector: Phones jack UNPUT UNBAL] jacks G and H are disconnected when this input is plugged. 4.[INSERT]J ack: G,H

External effector (generally a compressor/limiter, etc.) only used for G and H channel input is connected. Standard Input/Output Level: -10dBV Use a Y-cable, as shown below, to connect an external effector since the 96 TRS phones jack is used. To Effect Input TIP: senD GND From Effect Output

5: [MON OUT] (Monitor Output) J ack:L,R Connect a speaker with internal amp or amp + speaker for monitoring purposes. Standard Output Level: -10dBV Connector: Phones jack

6. [PHONES] (Headphones)]J ack

Headphones connection for monitoring purposes. Connector: TRS Phones jack 7.[PEAKI]LED: 1to 8

Lights ON if the input signal is approx. 2dB lower than the clipping level. Tune the [TRIM] knob whether to light ON or OFF the LED for the gain.

Adjusts the gain according to the input signal. Gain is adjustable between -50dBV (MIC) and +2dBV (LINE).

Adjusts the output level from the [MON OUT] jack.

Adjusts the output level form the [PHONES] jack. For more details, refer to the respective instructions of each item.

il. [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key: channels 1-16 ON/OFF key for each channel during normal display (explained later). Select the channel to CHECK/CHANGE the setting with ([CH PARAM EDIT] Key (No. 17-22) when CHECKING/ CHANGING various PAN, equalizer and other mixer parameters. Select the recorder track (1-16) for REC READY or REC CANCEL (SAFE) status (flashing [REC ASSIGN-DIRECT] key or [REC ASSIGN-BUSS] key]) when selecting the track to record. Pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key alone switches between on and off (mute) of the corresponding fader. Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIET] key switches between on and off the solo function. The flashing key illustrates the following STATUS: [ORANGE] The level ofthe inputsignals [INPUT]into input Ato H are adjustable. Only channels 9-16 are adjustable with the fader. The level ofthe audio [TRACK (PLAY)]on the track are adjustable with the fader. Itwill continue to flash when the SOLO function is ON. IGREEN} [OFF] The signals to the fader are [MUTE ](no sound).

IRED]: The corresponding tracks (1-16) are READY (to record). The [GREEN]and [RED]key will alternately flash. The light will remain ON during the recording process.

12. Channel Fader: channels 1-16

• The 1-8 channel faders are used to adjust the audio level [TRACK] of tracks 1-8.

• The 9-16 channel faders are used to adjust the sound level of signals input into A to H or audio levels [TRACK] of 9-16. Use the [INPUT SEL] key to choose which level to adjust. B: ISCENE-RECALL/DIRECT RCL]Key This is used to recall the scene memory.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed for direct scene memory recall.

• Simultaneously press this key and the [SCENE-STORE/ MAP] key to erase the scene memory.

14. ISCENE-STORE/MAP]Key

This is used to store scene memory.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the scene map.

• Simultaneously press this key and the [SCENE- RECALL/DIRECT RCL] key to erase the scene memory.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to turn ON/OFF the mute feature of EFFECT 1.

16. [EFF EDIT-EFF2/MUTE] Key

• This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the effect type and parameter settings of EFFECT 2. *_ Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to turn ON/OFF the mute feature of EFFECT 2. V7. [CH PARAM EDIT-EFF1/EFF2/PRE/POST]Key This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the send level settings of EFFECT 1 or EFFECT2. The EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 settings alternate every time the key is pressed. Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the PRE/POST settings of EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key to select the channel to change any settings together.

18. [CH PARAM EDIT-EQ/COMP-HI/G/F/Q/COMP] Key

This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the high frequency parametric equalizer settings. The parameter settings alternate every time the key is pressed. Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the COMPRESSOR settings. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key to select the channel to CHECK/CHANGE any settings together.

1. [CH PARAM EDIT-AUX1/AUX2/PRE/POST] Key

This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the send level settings of AUX 1 or AUX 2. The AUX 1 and AUX 2 settings alternate every time the key is pressed. Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the PRE/POST settings of AUX 1 or AUX 2. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key to select the channel to change any settings together.

This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the midrange frequencies of the parametric equalizer settings. Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the settings. 21 [CH PARAM EDIT-PAN/FADER] Key

This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the PAN settings. Press this key while the [SHIET] key is depressed to show the current fader location. Finer level adjustment is possible by using the [JOG] dial. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the channel to change any settings together.

This is used to CHECK/CHANGE the low frequencies of the parametric equalizer settings. Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to show the settings of the selected channel.

*_ Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the channel to change any settings together.

3. [MASTER CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key

This becomes the master channel ON/OFF key when the LCD is in the normal display mode (described later).

• Select the channel to CHECK/CHANGE any settings With the ([CH PARAM EDIT] Key (No. 17-22)] to CHECK/CHANGE any PAN, equalizer or other mixer settings. *_ The STATUS of the key lights ON are defined below. ÎIGREEN] The level ofthe stereo buss L, R outputs are adjustable with the fader. [OFF]: The signals to the master fader are IMUTE] {no sound). 24.[MASTER]Fader
• This is used to adjust the master level of the sound signals output from the STEREO OUT L, R jacks. For more details, refer to the respective instructions of each item.

Set whether to send the A to H input signals [INPUT] or track 9-16 play [TRACK] sounds to the faders of channel faders 9 to 16.

• When executing DIRECT recording, with the [SHIFT] key pressed down, each time the [INPUT SEL] key is pressed while in the normal display mode, the input monitor (READY) can be switched ON/OFF for all tracks (1-16). However, any track that is setup to [IN] (Input) by the INPUT SEL setting ([INJ-[TRK]) cannot be changed to input monitor.

26. [REC ASSIGN-BUSS-SOURCE] Key

• Select the channel (SOURCE) to send to the REC BUSS during “BUSS” recording. Select the SOURCE channel With the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key. *_ This key lights ON when the SOURCE is selected.

27. ÎREC ASSIGN-BUSS-REC TRK] Key

The track (READY) to record in “BUSS” recording is selectable when this key is flashing. Set READY track With the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] Key.

• This key lights ON when the READY track is set for “BUSS” recording.

28. ÎREC ASSIGN-DIRECT-REC TRK] Key

The track (READY) record in “DIRECT” recording is selectable when this key is flashing. Set READY track With the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key.

• This key lights ON when the READY track is set for “DIRECT” recording.

29. [DISP SEL/TIMEBASE] Key

• This key is used to alternate the menu shown on the LOD in the following order.

• The tracks recorded vary, as shown below, according to the connection jack. a. Current location ofTIME BASE selected Shows the current location of the sound. b. REMAINING TIME BASE Selected (time remaining) Shows the time remaining and space available on the disk for recordings (in terms of mono track). c. MTC Time Input Shows the MTC time input in the [MIDI IN] jack. This is a convenience for operations as a slave device.

• The user can switch between time bases, as shown below, by pressing the [DISP SEL/TIME BASE] key, while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. a. ABS (Absolute Time) Indication An absolute time base from OOH OOM 00$ (ABS 0) to 24H O0M 00$. b. BAR/BEAT/CLK (Bar) The “Bar, Beat, Clock” of the beat and tempo set with the internal tempo map. c. MTC (MIDITime Code) Display of the MTC time setting.

• This is used to switch between programs 01 to 99. This is also used to create new programs. 31.[SETUP]Key
• This is used to go into the setup mode to set various parameters of the recorder and mixer.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK1].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

33. [AUTO PUNCH-IN/MARK2] Key

This key is used to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved at the recording start point (PUNCH IN POINT) when executing auto punch in/out, paste or erase.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK?2].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

34. [AUTO PUNCH-OUT/MARK3] Key

This key is used to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved at the recording end point (PUNCH OUT POINT) when executing auto punch in/out or erase.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK3].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK4].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

36. [CLIPBOARD-IN/MARK5] Key

This key is used to CHECK/CHANGE the parameter saved at the start point (CLIPBOARD IN POINT) when copying from or pasting to the clipboard.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARKS].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

37. [CLIPBOARD-ALIGN SEL/MARK6] Key

This key is used to CHECK/CHANGE the parameter saved at the align point (ALIGN POINT) when copying/pasting or moving/pasting.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK6].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

38. [CLIPBOARD-OUT/MARK7] Key

This key is used to CHECK/CHANGE the parameter saved at the end point (CLIPBOARD OUT POINT) when copying from or pasting to the clipboard.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to CHECK/CHANGE the parameters saved in [MARK7].

• This can be used as Locate Memory.

39. [A RTN/A PLAY/SCENE SEQ.]Key

• Every time this key is pressed the mode switches from Auto Play -> Auto Return -> Auto Repeat -> OFF, and this mode is shown on the LCD.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to turn ON/OFF the scene sequence. When scene sequence is switched “on”, the normal display section “S**” will change to reversed black and white display.

This key is used to hold the parameter (time or BAR/ BEAT/CLK) when the key is pressed. The parameter is simultaneously displayed and is editable.

• When this key is pressed at editing of the value, the digit can be moved to the right or below, and if this key is pressed while pressing on the [SHIFT] key, it can be moved to the left or above. 41.[STORE]Key

• This key is used to store the edited parameters (time or BAR/BEAT/CLK) to the editing point (AUTO PUNCH POINT, etc.), MARK point, LOCATE MEMORY, etc.

• This key is used to copy, past and edit the sound. The following 5 types of sound editing types are possible. a. [Copy Clip] b. [Move Clip] c. [Copy Paste] or [Move Paste] d. [Erase] e. [Track Exchange]

This key is used to copy, past and edit sound as well as cancel and undo the auto punch in/out, recording and other processes.

• Press this key again to return to the state prior to undo (redo).

44. [VARI PITCH/P.EDIT] Key

• Every time this key is pressed the mode alternates between VARI PITCH (PLAY/REC at different speed) ON (Key: Light ON)/OFF (Key: Light OFF).

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to alter the speed variation (Pitch Edit). 45.[LOCATE/EVT MEM]Key

• This key is used to locate the editing point (AUTO PUNCH POINT, etc.) and Mark Point.

• The last located parameter is saved as the parameter of this key, every time. Therefore, it is possible to simply press this key to go to the last located point (LAST LOCATE).

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to edit the parameter saved in Event Memory (Event number 01-99).

This is used to digitally scrub sounds in the FWD and REV direction without any change in pitch. *_ Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key switches the playback mode between HDD playback and audio CD playback. 47: [RECORD/AUTO PUNCH]Key Press the [PLAY] key while this key is depressed (or press this key while the [PLAY] key is depressed) to start recording the READY track. (Key: Light ON) *_ The READY track goes in the input monitor mode when only this key is pressed (Key: Flashing). Pressing this key again cancels the input monitor and the READY track goes to the Playback Monitor mode.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to turn ON/OFF AUTO PUNCH.

Press this key during PLAY, REC, F FWD, REW to stop recorder operations.

• Press this key in the SETUP mode to escape one stage each from the SETUP mode.

• Press the [PLAY]/[REWIND]/[F FWD)] key while this key is depressed for the following operations.

• This is used to CANCEL/PAUSE the SETUP menu settings, copy/paste and various other sound editing processes.

ISTOP]#PLAY]: CLIPBOARD PLAY

Play the sound that is copied or moved to the clipboard.

ISTOP]JHRE WIND]: LOCATE ABSO

Locate the beginning of the ABS (ABS = OOM 00S 00F) of the current program.

ISTOP}HF FWD]: LOCATE REC END

Locate the portion in which sound is recorded (REC END) on the current program. 49.[PLAY]Key

• Press this key to start playing the recorder.

• Press the [RECORD] key while this key is depressed (or press this key while the [RECORD] key is depressed) to start recording the READY track. + PUNCH OUT (REC CANCEL) takes place when only the [PLAY] key is pressed during the recording process.

• Press this key while the [STOP] key is depressed to start “CLIPBOARD PLAY”.

50. [RE WIND/PRE V] Key

• Press this key while the machine is stopped for 30X rewind speed. *_3X cuing (rewinding with sound) takes place when this key is pressed during the PLAY status.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to locate the “PREV” (previous) memory (locate the previous event memory).

• Press this key while depressing the [STOP] key to “LOCATE ABS 0”.

• Press this key while the machine is stopped for 30X rewind speed. *_3X cuing (rewinding with sound) takes place when this key is pressed during the PLAY status.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to locate the “NEXT” memory (locate the next event memory).

• Press this key while depressing the [STOP] key to “LOCATE REC END”.

• Press this key while editing the parameters to move the column (digit) to edit. 52: [FADER ADJ UST/LEVEL AD] UST] Key This key flashes during scene memory recall, etc. to notify the user that the currently set fader parameter and the internally set fader position are not the same.

• Press this key to go to the Fader Adjust Mode. The internally set fader position is checked. By adjusting the fader setting manually it is possible to adjust the actual fader position according to the internally set fader position.

• Press this key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to go to the Level Adjust Mode. This forcibly adjusts the volume to the current fader position. 53.[SHIFT] Key

• This key is used as the function key for various keys and dials that have a shift function. The key functions are shown at the bottom of the key if the key has a shift function.

54. [EXIT/NO/EJ ECT]Key

• This is used to CANCEL/PAUSE the SETUP menu settings, copy/paste and various other sound editing processes. This key is the opposite of the [ENTER/YES] key. 55.[ENTER/YES]Key *_ This is used to SET/EXECUTE the SETUP menu settings, copy/paste and various other sound editing processes. This key is the opposite of the [EXIT/NO] key.

56. J OG/SHUTTLE] Dial

• Turn ON the [SCRUB] key, press [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of a voluntary channel, then turn the jog dial for digital sound scrubbing in the FWD and REV direction without any change in pitch.

• Turn this dial while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to F FWD/REW between a shuttle speed of 1X to 64X depending on the degree the dial is turned.

• The jog dial can be used to increase/decrease the parameter settings during the editing process. For more details, refer to the respective instructions of each item.

= (C0 57.[ACCESS]LED *_ This LED lights ON when the internal hard disk drive or external SCSI device for backup purposes is writing or reading data.

*_ This lights ON when the phantom power is ON. The phantom power is turned ON/OFF with the setup mode.

59. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

• The recorder and mixer status and parameters are shown on the LCD.

60. Contrast Adjusting Knob

• This is used to adjust the contrast (difference in brightness) of the LCD. Increase or decrease the contrast by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively. Rear Panel

External effector or other devices are connected to output the AUX SEND 1/2 signals.

• Standard Output Level: -10dBV

• Use a Y-cable, as shown below, to connect an external effector since the 56 TRS Phones jack is used. TIP GND To Effect 1 AUX1 Lr-4 + l Ca RING: AUX2 To Effect 2

62. [ST OUT-L/R]J ack

• Master recorders and other devices are connected to output stereo L/R signals. *_ Standard Output Level: -10dBV

• Connect to the MIDI OUT jack of an external MIDI device.

*_ MIDI control signals such as MMC (MIDI Machine Control) is mainly input.

• Connector: DIN 5 PIN

Connect to the MIDI IN jack of an external MIDI device.

• MIDI synchronization signals such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MIDI clock signals & song position pointers are mainly output.

• Connector: DIN 5 PIN

6. [DIGITAL/DATA IN]J ack

Connect to OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT (S/P DIF) or adat DIGITAL OUT of an external digital device for signal input to the VFI160EX.

• This is used to load DAT/adat song data.

• Connector: Square optical

66. [DIGITAL/DATA OUT]J ack

Connect to OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (S/P DIE) or adat DIGITAL IN of an external digital device for signal output from the VF160EX.

• This is used to save DAT/adat song data.

• Connector: Square optical

*_ Punch IN/OUT option by connecting the Fostex Model 8051 foot switch (unlatched type).

*_ This turns ON/OFF the power of the VF1GO0EX.

• This is where the accessory power cable is inserted. For more details, refer to the respective instructions of each item. Front Panel

*_ After turning the power on, pressing the eject key in the front of the drive opens the tray. To close the tray, push the front of the tray lightly by your hand. Using the CD-R/RW drive, you can also save/load song data to/from a CD-R or CD-RW disc, or burn an original audio CD.

EEE V'FISOEX FOSteX Aboutthe hard disk storage device The VF160EX is complete with a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk (storage device) which is formatted in the Master 16 mode. Therefore, there is no need to newly assemble a hard disk or to format the hard disk. The user can immediately start recording with the VF1G0EX. Note that the current hard disk can also be replaced with another model for use with the VF1GOEX. (However, please only use hard disks that Fostex recommends.) Reformatting the hard disk This section describes how to reformat the hard disk. The VF160EX adopts a “FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3)” format which is a Fostex exclusive format. Eight additional tracks can be used in addition to recording and playing 16-tracks of uncompressed 44.1kHz/16 bit high quality sound. <Precaution> Note that, when you reformat your hard disk, you will erase all data saved or recorded on the hard disk, as well as all the settings made. Reformatting your hard disk restore the VF160EX back to the default setting. Always make a point to check that there is no data that you need remaining on the hard disk prior to reformatting.

1. Turn ON the VF160EX. The hard disk formatted in the “Standard” type upon

newly formatting the hard disk will show “Standard” and

2. Press the [SE TUP] key. “Erase”. The hard disk formatted in the “Quick” type upon

The system will go to the SETUP mode. The select display newly formatting the hard disk will show “Standard” and of the SETUP menu appears. (The highlight indicates the “Quick”. The user can select one. menu that is currently selected.) — — u The hard disk is formatted with the access time of the unit sectors, while judging whether the sectors are good or bad. The formatting time Standard | tends to be longer with this type, however, the reliability is better. Therefore, itis recommended that this default format type is selected under normal conditions. This choice is only available when a hard disk ñ ihli api 7 previously formatted in the “Standard” type is

3. Tum the D OG] dial to highlight the “Disk Format” being reformatted. With this format, the

menu title, press the [ENTER/YES] key. Erase | “Standard”type is maintained, while all data on The menu to select the format type appears. the hard disk are erased. The display will appear as follows, according to the The formatting time is shorter than the time previous format type. “## represents the name of the required to format a “Standard”type. drive. This is a quick formatting procedure in which all — hard disk sectors are considered to be good FaderRecall Oif sectors. The formatting time is fast, however, Fair Fader Set Quick | the procedure cannot discover bad sectors. FhamtomPower Off Therefore, itis recommended that this format ii type is only used when formatting a new hard L ] disk that Fostex has already confirmed to [il operate normally. UF 4. Selectthe format type with the [F FWD] key or Disk Format — ÎRE WIND] key. Then press the [ENTER/YES] key. Format Type Select A OR RCE The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes. flashing Erase EFUD :+ Hit NES or HO ken kiki Format HAE

5. Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD]

key is depressed. Disk Format If the “Standard” format is selected and executed, the Comeleted! formatting process takes place while showing the progress tt totah of the good sectors (Good ***MB) on the disk, bad sectors £oad at on the disk (Bad ***MB) and remainder (Remain **MB). Hit VES or HO keg Nothing can be done during the formatting process. Please wait for a while until the process is completed.

6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape

Disk Format + from the SETUP mode. Watt Farnattinet The Normal Display appeai s indic: ing the beginning of EMETEET EEE EN PET EEE EITYET ES the program (PO1) that is automatically created after Gao formatting the hard disk. Éad Femain When the hard disk is successfully formatted (formatting completed), the number of sectors and noncontiguous sectors are shown after formatted, then “Complete lights up. Formatting is completed instantaneously if either “Erase” or “Quick” is selected and executed. For this reason, the “Completed!” message lights up without showing the progress status while formatting is taking place. Replacing a hard disk [ <Operation Confirmed HD & Backup Media List for the VF160EX> The updated information on the operation-confirmed HD and backup media for VF160EX is mentioned in the following Fostex international web site. <http: // www. fostex.co.jp/int/index.htm> For those who are unable to check our web site, please contact the Fostex distributor in your territory. <Warning> This section describes the procedures to replace the hard disk. However, we recommended that the customer ask the Fostex Customer Service Department to replace the VF160EX hard disk. Note that the product is not warranted for any malfunctions that may occur after the customer replaces the hard disk on their own. Also note that Fostex will not be held liable for any accidents that may occur during the replacement process or any hard disk damages, if the customer decides to replace their own hard disk on their own. <Precautions Upon Replacement>

• Always turn OFF the power of the VF160EX and unplug the power plug from the electric outlet when replacing the hard disk. *_ Ahvays place the hard disk on a flat and stable platform during the replacement process. Place a soft cloth under the unit to protect the product from scratching. Gloves are recommended to prevent any hand injuries. <Precautions Upon Handling the Hard Disk> *_ A hard disk is an extremely sensitive precision device. Never expose the hard disk to “strong shocks” when replacing, assembling or handling. Never leave the hard disk by a device that generates strong magnetic fields. *_ Always set the DIP switch and Jumper of the newly assembled hard disk to the [Cable Select] setting. The hard disk will not operate normally if the setting is set to [MASTER] or [SLAVE] when the hard disk is assembled. Refer to the User’s Manual of the hard disk for more details on the DIP switch and Jumper settings. Note that the connector of some hard disks may be stiff, and thus make it difficult or impossible to insert or connect. Never apply excessive force to insert the connector in such case, Always make a point to gently insert the connector. Failure to do so may result in unexpected injuries or damage the hard disk.

EEE V'FISOEX FOSteX L Unscrew the four screws fixing the panel to the 4. Prepare a new hard disk and connectthe two cable bottom of the VF160EX main unit. connectors to it with holding the connector section. If the panel is removed, the hard disk covered with a cushion can be seen. Bottom 0) Hard disk unit Connector

2. Take outthe hard disk to the direction “2” indicated

in the drawing below. Slighüy lifting up the cushion upward helps you take out 5. Put back the new hard disk into the VF160EX main the hard disk easily. unit. When taking it out, do not apply excessive force. In the reverse order of taking out the hard disk as performed earlier, carefully house the hard disk at the bottom of the main unit and cover it with the cushion. Cushion Cushion Hard disk unit

3. Hold the connector section and gentily pull out the

two cable connectors from the hard disk.

6. After checking that the cables, etc. are not sticking

out from the main unit, put the panel onto the hard disk and the case. Align the position of screw holes on the panel / case with the VF160EX bottom panel screw holes and fix the panel / case using the four screws to the VF160EX main unit. When the new hard disk is successfully assembled, go to the next section. Now, format the unformatted hard disk.

FOSteX VAISOS< EE Formatting the new hard disk Carefully follow the instructions below to newly format the hard disk properly.

1. Turn ON theVF160EX after plugging the power cable

in the electric outlet. The VF160EX will startup. “Unformat!” will appear on the LCD. The menu will automatically go to the SETUP mode. The display showing the “Disk Format” menu appears. Select Menu 1 FaderRecall Off Fair Fader Set FhamtomPouer

2. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The menu to select the format type appears. “er represents the name of the drive. SETUP R Disk Format 1 Format Tape Select

flashing —{ Guick Æi EFUD + Hit_VES or HO kes <CAUTION> Either the “Standard” or “Quick” format type can be selected. However, make sure that the “Standard” format type is selected when formatting à newly installed hard disk.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the “Standard”

is flashed. The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.

4. Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD]

key is depressed. The formatting process is started. The formatting process will take some time. When the formatting is successfully completed, “Completed!” will light up on the display.

5. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape

from the SETUP mode. The Normal Display appears indicating the beginning of the program (PO1) that is automatically created after formatting the hard disk. Pal:#0681 Säÿs Init MixE ete 183456N08 AIDIHIANINISIE dE LE <Normal Display>

Chapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback

This chapter describes basic recording and playback with the VF160EX. Before carrying out recording/playback, read “About a demonstration song!”, “Connections of Periph- eral Equipment” and “LCD”. About a demonstration song! (Read Your VF1GOEX may have a demonstration song on program 1 (PO1) when shipped (note that some VF160EX units may not have a demonstration song, depending on the production). Please check whether a demonstration song is recorded or not on your unit according the following manner. before using the unit) <To check whether a demonstration song is recorded or not> After turning on the unit and boosting up program 1, press the [PLAY] key to start playback. *Ifthe level meters move: A demonstration song is recorded. Title of the recorded demonstration song will be indicated for the program title. «If the level meters do not move: No demonstration song is recorded. Temporary title such as "#0001" will be indicated for the program titl ei El Püli:#9861 Sgg: Init MixE took nit MixE If a demonstration song is recorded, you can listen to the song any time by playing back program 1 (see page 31 for details about how to play back a program). Note that you cannot record a new material on program 1 if a demonstration song is recorded on program 1. Therefore, before starting recording for the first time, you must carry out any of the following operations. Note: You can start recording without the need for carrying out any of the following operations if no demonstration song is recorded on your unit. If you wish to start recording while keeping the demonstration song Create a new program. The newly created program is not record-prohibited, so you can record a material onto it. See page “70” for details about how to create a new program. If you wish to record a material on program 1 (overwriting the demonstration song) Set "Rec Protect" menu in the setup mode to "Off". Now you can overwrite the demonstration song on program 1 by a new material. See page “140” for details about how to make the record-protect setting to "Off". If you wish to record a material onto program 1 after deleting the demonstration song Delete program 1. After deleting program 1, a new blank "program 1" is automatically created onto which you can record a new material. See page “71” for details about how to delete à program.

FostexX VAISOS< Connections of Peripheral Equipme The VF160EX is equipped with input/output jacks to connect the following sound sources and external equipment. Always turn the [MASTER] fader, [MON OUT] knob and [PHONES] knob to “0” when connecting the external equipment to the input/output jacks. Compressor/Limitter eee eece Monitor S peaker Input Output ==] ==] à} Q [© Microphone AUS Guitar & Processor Microphone RE f: : : CH IT © Monitor Amplifier! Keyboard Unbalanced output Balanced output [ | Headphones Da EX EX EX EX EX Signal processor etc. Devos vecs Sequencer PC w/sequence software etc. MIDI IN AC 100V adat digital input Digital In/Out ms | | CODEN el GRO) adat digital output = = © Analog input bo ace go00 6 ‘CHOC È | | sus] =) =) 2,0. 2€, adat digital equipment Master Recorder etc

EEE VFISOE< FOStex The following describes the contents shown on the LCD and their operations. Menu shown when turning power ON Switching theTime Base When the VF160EX is turned ON with a hard disk already formatted, the following menu will appear in order: [nitial... (Initializing)] & [Version] -> [Current Dr] > [IDE] -> [Name of Hard disk (Instantly)] -> [Recording mode (Standard or Quick)]. The head of the program (ABS 0) will then start up at the time base when the power was turned OFF. The LCD menu appearing immediately after turning the power ON is called the “Normal Display”. The “Normal Display” shows the following items for the 3 time bas

• Current Location/Program Number & Program Title

The user can switch between time bases, by pressing the [DISP SEL] key, while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. In this case the time base alternates in the order of “1. ABS” -> “2, BAR/BEAT/CLK” -> “3, MTC” ->.. The normal display always appears when the time base is switched. Make use of these displays accordingly.

FostexX VAISOS< Switching with [DISP SEL]Key Every time the [DISP SEL] key is pressed the LCD alternately shows the “1. Normal Display of CurrentTime Base” -> “2.REMAIN Display of CurrentTime Base” -> “3. MTC Time Display Input”. The description of each display is defined below. L Normal Display of CurrentTime Base Current time according to current time base. *_ Program number and program title. The first 9 characters of the program title are shown. *_ Scene number and scene name. The first 9 characters of the scene name are shown. *_ Level meter of tracks 1 to 16. *_ L/R master level meter SES Pal: #04E 1 559 rit MixE Ta34SEN8 AIDES dE LR

2. RE MAIN Display of CurrentTime Base

REMAIN time and space available in mono-track converted units according to the current time base (the following is the case in ABS).*1 Format type. Name of hard dis Level meter of tracks 1 to 16. L/R master level meter. He x x *1. *2. The REMAINING time display appears as follows according to the time base that has been selected.

ï É 345698 AIDINAIMIMISIE dE LA Time Base: BAR/BEAT/CLK Icons of the program setup details appear at the right side of the menu. Refer to examples below. This indicates recording/no recording setup by the “Rec Protect” menu. The REC icon shown here is indicating that it is presently set “Off” and thus recording is possible. Master lé EME FIREEALL 1ct68OaHIEE

MTC time input. “00H 00M 00$ O0F” appears if there is no time input. *_ Program number and program title. The first 16 characters of the program title are shown. *_ Scene number and scene name The first 16 characters of the

This is indicating the VF160EX sampling frequency (Fixed to 44.1kHz). Theicon hereis indicatingthatthe current drive is setto an “E-IDE hard disk." This indicates the MIDI sync outputsignal setup by the “Midi Sync Out’menu. The icon here is indicating thatitis presentiy setto "CLK.” This indicates the slave type setup by the ET “Slave Type” menu. This icon is indicating thatitis presentiy setto ‘VARI." Frame rate figure setup by the “MTC Frame Rate” menu is indicated here. The icon here is indicating that it is presentiy setto “25 Frames.”

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Instructions for DIRECT Record This section describes the basic REC/PLAY procedures in the “DIRECT” recording mode, which is the easiest recording procedure and also provides recordings that most closely resemble the original. Hints and tips to successfully operate the VF160EX are included according to the work flow, ranging from the actual recording to mix down process. Both experienced and novice users of multitracker should try this process so as to learn the VF1G6O0EX operations. The following description assumes that the VF160EX has been started up without any recordings. DIRECT Recording INPUT The figure on the right shows the relations between input channels and recording tracks in the DIRECT recording mode. You can see that up to 8 input channel signals can be recorded simultaneously. WARNING! AH ee *_Itis also possible to simultaneously record 16 tracks. Boweve ere il be consccutie ras On Wie same L8862822 sound is recorded. *_ The channel with the ORANGE light ON ([INPUT]) from among ch9-16 of the ICH STATUS/CH SEL] Keys cannot output the audio sound on the tracks corresponding to 9-16, therefore, recording RECORDER Will be prohibited. 126 Track D CCE As a result, the READY state cannot be established with the |] Sal IDIRECT-REC TRK] key. Recording to One Track Here, we will record to track 1 of the recorder. Check to see that the channel faders of ch1-16 and the master fader are set to “-x” (completely down) and that [TRIM] A to H are set to LINE position (fully turn to left). Also use (connect) a headphone or monitor speakers to monitor the sound. Caution!

FostexX VAISOS< Preparing to Record Connectthe sound source to record to the [INPUT] 1/9/ A jack. Press the [INPUT SEL] key (Key: Flashes ORANGE). [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch9-16 -> Flashes GREEN Indicates that all channels are “TRK (Track)” (the following LCD display appears).

WARNING! In DIRECT Recording, all channel faders are basically “TRK”. If there is channel in which the “IN (Input)” (RED: Flashing), press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of that channel so it is a “TRK”. Press the [DIRECT-REC TRK] key (RED: Flashing). The menu to select the track to record appears.

QOQQooOgQ Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display. [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch1 -> Alternately Flashes GREEN/RED

• Indicates that trk1 is “RDY (Ready)”. Press [RECORD]key to settrkl to the InputMonitormode (Key: Flashing RED). Setthe ch1 fader and master fader to “0”. E Outputsound from the sound source while adjusting the [TRIM]1/9/A gain to an optimal level. The guideline for optimal gain is the border of the [PEAK] LED lighting ON or OFF, when the sound source is at the maximum volume. Adjustments should also ensure that the signal does not exceed 0 on the LCD level meter. To listen to the sound turn up the [MON OUT] knob or IPHONES] knob. WARNING! Be careful not to excessively raise the volume of the IMON OUT] or [PHONES] level. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have an adverse effect on hearing.

Tips: Level meter When carrying out step 8 mentioned above, levels for channel 1 and masters Land R are shown in the meters on the Normal display. The channel 1 fader controls the signal level sent to the stereo busses Land R, which you monitor. If you completely drop down the channel 1 fader, you cannot monitor the sound, but the input level of chan- nel 1 (= recording level of track 1) is not affected. To control the input level of each channel, use the [TRIM] knob as mentioned in step 8. RECORD L Press the [REWIND] key while the [STOP] key is depressed, to locate ABS 0 (Locate ABS 0).

2. Press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is

depressed to start recording. The RED light of [CH STATUS/CH SEL]key and [RECORD] key of ch1 lights up to indicate that ch1 is recording.

3. Press the [STOP] key to stop the recording operations.

The LCD will show a “PleaseWait” message and then return to the Normal Display. This completes the process to record on track 1. Check the sound recorded using the following procedures. Cancel READY Status of Recording Track Press once again the [DIRECT-REC TRACK] key that is lit up RED, then press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the channel that is in the READY mode to cancel the ready state of the track recorded and to put that track in the SAFE mode. Then press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display. PLAY L Press the [REWIND]key while the [STOP]key is depressed to locate ABS 0.

2. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

The play level oftrack 1 can be adjusted with the ch1 fader. This concludes the procedures to check the sound recorded. Tips: UNDO/REDO Press the [UNDO/REDO)] key after recording to return to the prerecording state (UNDO). Press the [UNDO/REDO] key again to return to the original state of the recording ontrack 1 (REDO). The UNDO/REDO function is effective for all recordings.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex RECORDING to 2Tracks With track 1 now recorded, we will record the stereo sound source to tracks 15 and 16 of the recorder. Preparing to Record [1] Connect the stereo sound source to record to [INPUT] jacks 7/15/G and 8/16/H. E Press the [DIRECT-REC TRK]key (RED: Flashing). E Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key for ch15 and ch16 (RED: Flashing). Trk15 and 16 will go to the “RDY (Ready)” mode. The other tracks will be in the “SAFE” mode (Key: Light OFF). [4] Press the [EXIT/NO] key. [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch 15 and 16 -> GREEN/RED: Alternately Flash

• Indicates that trk15 and 16 are “RDY (Ready)”. [5] Press the [RECORD] key to puttrk15 and 16 in the Input Monitor mode (RED: Flashing). Trk15 and 16 will got to the Input Monitor mode.

E Setthe ch15 and ch16 fader and master fader to “0”. Tips: How to make a fader pair You can pair two adjacent faders. By pairing faders 15 and 16, for example, you can con- trol both channels (15 and 16) simultaneously via a single fader. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders. Output sound from the sound source while adjusting the [TRIM]7/15/G and 8/16/H gain to an optimal level. RECORD 1 Locate the time to start recording.

2. Press the [PLAY]key whilethe [RECORDI]keyis depressed

to start recording. The [CH STATUS/CH SEL]key and [RECORD]key of ch15 and 16 lights up RED to indicate that the channels are recording. By increasing the fader level of track 1, the user to tracks 15 and 16 (overdubbing) while listening to the playback sounds of track 1. 3.Press the [STOP] key to stop recording.

Tips: Changing the recording mode PLAY To change the DIRECT recording mode to the BUSS re- 1. Locate the time to playback. cording mode, press the [BUSS-RECTRK]key while the tracks to be directly recorded are selected using the 2. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback. step above. "Rec Mode Change!" appears and "Sure?" Ch1, ch15 and ch16 faders can be used to adjust the play flashes on the screen. level of each track. After recording, put the “READY” track in the “SAFE” mode, Rec Mode Chanse! as described earlier. Tips: MUTE Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key in the Normal Display to MUTE (silence) that channel ([CH STATUS/CH SEL] key: Light OFF). Taa4sens Pressing the [ENTER/YES]key cancels the selection of tracks for the DIRECT recording and changes the dis- play to the track selection screen for the BUSS record- ing. Tips: UNDO/REDO Press the [UNDO/REDO] key after recording to return to the prerecording state (UNDO). Press the [UNDO/ REDO]key again to return to the original state of the recording on two tracks (REDO). The VF160EX provides sophisticated locate functions, which allow quick locate to the desired point. ABS Locate There are 3 types of ABS Locate procedures. The instructions are described below. + Press the [REWIND] key while the [STOP]key is depressed to locate ABS 0 which is the head of the program. That head is located for all time bases. + Press the [F FWD]key while the [STOP] key is depressed to locate the REC end time of the last recording (REC END). This is a convenient feature to search the end of a song or to find out how long a song is. + Press the [RECORD] key while the [STOP] key is depressed to locate the start time of the last recording. It will locate to “ABS 0” if recording had not been executed even once after switch on of power. Locating a mark pointusing a Memory Key and Mark Key The VF160EX provides seven keys for registering time information. These are called “memory keys”. You can register two time data for each memory key. One is “mark memory” point data, used for locate functions. The other is time data, which is used for track editing functions such as auto return, auto punch in/out and copy/ paste. However, you can also use the latter one for locate functions, when you do not use track editing functions. Therefore, when you do not use track editing functions, you can store up to 14 locate memory points, while you can store up to 7 memory points when using track editing functions. The table on the next page shows the data stored for each memory key. You can do this operation in any time base.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex DOOOOD <Note> Normally, the [CLIPBOARD-ALIGN SEL/MARK6]key can store the MARK6 memory. When doing a copy/paste (or move/paste) function, the time data stored in the ICLIPBOARDIN]key is automatically copied and stored in this key, allowing you to use it as the ALIGN SEL point. See “Copy/paste and Move/paste” on page 73 for details. The following details are saved in each Memory Key. [AUTO RTN-START/MARK 1] Key: -> START point and MARK 1 memory. IAUTO PUNCH-IN/MARK 2] Key: -> PUNCHIN pointand MARK 2 memory. IAUTO PUNCH-OUT/MARK 3] Key: -> PUNCH OUT pointand MARK 3 memory. [AUTO RTN-END/MARK 4] Key: -> END point and MARK 4 memory. ICLIPBOARD-IN/MARK 5] Key: -> CLIP IN pointand MARK 5 memory. ICLIPBOARD-ALIGN SEL/MARK 6] Key: -> ALIGN SEL pointand MARK 6 memory. ICLIPBOARD-OUT/MARK 7] Key: -> CLIP OUT pointand MARK 7 memory. Saving on the Memory key and Mark key L Ensure the system is in the PLAY or STOP status. Press the [HOLD/>] key at the time to save. The time is held on the LCD at the point the [HOLD/>] key is pressed, 3-1. Press a voluntary Memory key. The time held is saved as a point of the Memory Key, and then the system returns to the Normal Display. 3-2. Press the [MARK 1-7] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. The time held is saved as a Mark Memory of MARK 1-7, and the system returns to the Normal Display. Tips: How to check stored time data To check the memory points, press the desired memory key. To check the mark memory, press the desired memory key while depressing the [SHIFT] key. Direct Location of Memory key or Mark key 1-1. Press a voluntary Memory key. The name of the key pressed and the point saved appears on the LCD. 1-2. Press the [MARK 1-7] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. The name of the Mark Memory and the time saved appears on the LCD. LOCATE= MARKS 1

2. Press the [LOCATE] key.

This allows Direct Location to the time shown. Tips: PREROLL By setting “PREROLL” in the SETUP mode, it is possible to locate the time (0-10 seconds) several seconds before the time set to locate. Changing the Time Saved in the Memory key and Mark key 1-1. Press a voluntary Memory key. The name of the key pressed and the point saved appears on the LCD. 1-2. Press the [MARK 1-7] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. The name of the Mark Memory and the time saved appears on the LCD.

2. Change the parameter of the flashing column (cursor)

(H/M/S/F/SF or BAR/BEAT/CLK) using the [J OG] dial. Move the flashing column (cursor) by pressing the IHOLD/>] key.

3. Press the [STORE] key (RED: Light ON).

3-1. Press a voluntary Memory key. The time modified is saved as the time point of the Memory Key, and the system returns to the Normal Display. 3-2. Press the [MARK 1-7] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. The time modified is saved as a Mark Memory of MARK 1-7, and the system returns to the Normal Display.

FostexX VAISOS< Locating an event memory You can store up to 99 event memory points (00 to 99). These event memory points can be used for locate functions described below as well as for the “scene event map” function described in “Chapter 3 Mixer functions”. Creating an event memory 7 ù <int> Event memory numbers are assigned in ascending order of ABS time, regardless of order in which event memories are created. For example, if you create event memories in order as shown in the upper diagram below, the event memory numbers are assigned as shown in the lower diagram.

EVTO1 EVTO2 EVTO3 EVTO4 EVTOS EVTO6 EVTO7 ABSO 02M305 05M00S 07M305 12M30S 12M305 15M00S 17M305 L J L Atthe desired position while the VF160EX is stopped or during playback, press the [HOLD/>] ke The time when pressing the [HOLD/>] key is held on the screen.

2. Press the [STORE] key.

The key lights up (in red) and “Hit Any Memory Keys!” appears on the screen. GinSSs24rS9sr Memors Keus!l Hit Fina

3. Press the [LOCATE/EVT MEM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key. “Entry EVT#” (where * shows the number) appears for a short time, while the time held in step 1 is entered in the event memory. Viewing the event memories

3. After viewing the screen, press the [E XIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal display. [Hint> You can delete unnecessary event memories. See “Edit- ing the event map” in “Advanced mixer operations” de- scribed later for details. Locate by specifying the event memory LPress the [SCENE-STORE MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to bring up the event map screen.

2. Use the |} 0G] dial to selectthe desired event number, and

press the [LOCATE] key. The unit locate the selected memory point and stops, while the display returns to the Normal display. When selecting an event memory, you can know the nearest event memory point to the current point by the flashing event number (in the example below, event number 02 is the nearest). Flashing — Skip locate With the Skip locate function using the event memo- ries, the unit automatically recognizes the locate point and locate there. When the Skip locate is executed, the locate point is shown on the screen and you will know where the current position goes. Current position

EVTO1 EVTO2 EVTO3 EVTO4 EVTOS EVT 06

ABSO 02M30S 05M00S 07M30S 12M30S 15M00S 17M30S 100$ L Press the [SCENE-STORE/MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The display shows the event number select screen for the scene event map, in which you can view and check the event memories created by the procedure above. The unit for event memories - ABS, Bar/Beat/CIk or MTC - depends on the time base setting. É2 Ménage nn äS BéhO needs a GôhienSsdn

2. Rotate the [J OG]dial to scroll through the event memory

Press the [RE WIND/PREV] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to skip back to the previous event memory point.

2. Press the [F FWD/NEXT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to skip advance to the next event memory point. <Hint> By sequentially executing the key operation above as many times as required, you can locate the desired event memory. In the above screen, for example, to locate event O1 from the current position, press the [REWIND/PREV] key three times while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Punch IN/OUT recording enables you to record over previously recorded parts. This function comes in handy in the following cases.

• fa recording is unsatisfactory in either recording or performance and you wantto redo it.
• If you wantto record a solo partto another track while listening to the backup tracks. PUNCH IN refers to the process to switching from PLAY to REC. On the other hand, PUNCH OUT refers to the reverse process, to switch from REC to PLAY. The time to punch in is called the PUNCH IN point, and the time to punch out is called the PUNCH OUT point. The VF160EX features the following 3 types of PUNCH IN/OUT modes. *MANUAL PUNCH IN/OUT using the key on the main unit This feature is used for rough recordings. Manual punch in/out is not recommended during a performance since the proc requires using your hands. *PUNCH IN/OUT using the foot switch Recording is possible even during a performance since all punch in/out processes are controlled from the foot switch.

Detailed recording is possible since recording takes place with the punch in/out time preset (programmed) prior to the recording, Use the [DIRECT-REC TRK]key to put the track to record in the READY mode. The [TRIM] must be adjusted to an optimal gain according to the input monitor. When this is set, do the following: Manual Punch IN/OUT 2. Press the [PLAY] key from the point immediately before starting the recording, then playback. Press (RECORD) key while holding the [PLAY ] key. Press the [PLAY] key only. 3. Recording starts by stepping on the foot switch (punch {Punch in) {Punch Out) : s # in). Recording rack Ë F 4. Recording is canceled and playback takes place when the Playback > Record TT" foot switch is stepped on again (punch out). 1 Press the [PLAY] key from the point immediately before Tips: Rehearsal starting the recording and then playback. Step on the foot switch while the [STOP] key is depressed to start rehearsing the recording (“Rhrsi On” will appear

2. Press the [RECORD] key while the [PLAY] key is on the LCD then “RHSL” will light ON).

depressed to start recording (punch in).

3. Recording is canceled and playback takes place if only

the [PLAY] key is pressed (punch out). fiashing Punch IN/OUT with Foot switch Rehearsal instructions are the same as recording with the foot switch. However, stepping on the foot switch will go to input upon de oran So one tic a monitor, and stepping on it again will cancel it. To cancel (Pure in) (Punch Out the rehearsal mode, step on the foot switch again while i i the [STOP] key is depressed (“Rhrsl Off” will appear on Recording Trac : Î the LCD then “RHSL” will light OFF). Playback Playback

FostexX VAISOS< Auto Punch IN/OUT Before carrying out an auto punch in/out operation, you must register the “PUNCH IN” and “PUNCH OUT” points. Punch In point Punch Out paint Recording Track | É Playback Playback «Programming the PUNCH IN/OUT points <Note> When programming a PUNCH IN/OUT point, the time of the punch IN point must always be before the time of the PUNCH OUT point. If the PUNCH OUT point precedes the PUNCHIN point, a “Void Out!” error message appears on the LCD and prevents use of the AUTO PUNCH mode. + AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT take 1 After rehearsal is completed, locate the pointimmediately before starting the recording, as with step 2 of AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT rehearsal.

3. Press the [RECORD] key while the [PLAY] key is

depressed to start recording [TAKE]. “RHSL” changes to “TAKE”. The actual recording is made between the PUNCH IN and PUNCH OUT points. At the PUNCH OUT point, recording as well as the AUTO PUNCH mode stops. Light up

4. Press the [STOP]key to stop the VF160EX.

L While the system is in the PLAY or STOP mode, press the THOLD/>] key atthe time to program as the PUNCH IN or PUNCH OUT point.

PUNCH IN] key is pressed. The PUNCH OUT pointis programmed when the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key is pressed. + AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT rehearsal L Press the [RECORD] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to go to the “AUTO PUNCH Mode”. “RHSL” starts flashing. Flashing

2. LOCATE the pointimmediately before starting the

3. If only the [PLAY] key is pressed, the recordings are

rehearsed. “RHSL” steadily lights. In the rehearsal mode, even though recording is not actually executed, the monitor signal for a record-armed track changes to “input” at the punch-in point and returns to “source” at the punch-out point. You can check or adjust the record level and timing in the rehearsal mode as many times as you want until you are

4. Press the [STOP] key to stop the VF160EX.

Tips: Undo/Redo If you are not satisfied with the take, you can rerecord after pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Track Exchange Up to now, we changed the input channel according to the track to record. However, there is also a way to record all tracks with one input jack. You can do this by exchanging a recorded track that was recorded normally with an unrecorded track. This procedure is called “Track Exchange”. This feature is convenient to use when recording with all G and H [INPUT] jacks that can be connected with a condenser mic or balanced output, for example. Note that the VF160EX comes with 16 tracks, plus 8 additional tracks. The Track Exchange feature makes it possible to exchange these tracks with any unneeded tracks 1-16.

3. Turn the [J 0G] dial to select the track to exchange from.

Tips: Te Track Exchange can be done among all 24 real By rotating the [J 0G] dial, you can select the track unit en ee ; . among 1, 2 and 8. and additional tracks, as shown in the figure be- Depending on the selected unit, the track indication on the low. right changes (see the figure below). You can exchange track(s) in single, stereo, or 8- track units. «Selection in 8-track unit One track exchange Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 2 track block exchange : TB'irack biock'exchange Instructions 4. Press the [HOLD/>] key, then move the cursor to the track = to exchange to. For this procedure, you need a recorded track and a The cursor moves every time the [HOLD/5] key is pressed. blank track. The cursor can also be moved using the [REWIND] key or IF FWD] key. L Repeatedly press the [EDIT] key while the recorder is in 5. Tum the [J 0G] dial to select the track to exchange to. the STOP state to find and display the “Track Exchange” mode. The mode can also be selected by pressing the [EDIT] key 6. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. then turning the J 06] dial. “Exchange” appears on the LCD and the exchange process takes place instantaneously. “Completed!” appears on the LCD when the exchange process is completed. Free E Ex CETECE Then the system returns to the Normal Display. ke cd deed E

2. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. Exchanse

The track selection menu of the Track Exchange mode Comrleted! appears. Tips: “Select Err!” appears on the LCD and the exchange proces invalidated if the same track is selected for the track to exchange from and track to exchange and [ENTER/YES] key is pressed. (Ex: 03<=>03 and so on) mt M beered

FostexX VAISOS< After recording with DIRECT Recording, adjust the play level, equalize the sound or add some effects to the audio sound of track 1-16. This section describes how to adjust the level, PAN, equalizer, effect send level and effect. Level Adjustment Equalizer Adjustment + _ Use the Channel Fader to adjust the play level of each Tips: channel. For fader-paired channels (set by the “Pair fader setting” menu in the Setup mode), controlling EQ settings for one channel affects both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders. + _Usethe Master Fader to adjustthe stereo OUT level ofthe output signal of the sounds mixed. Tips: Master Level Check the stereo OUT level with the L/R level meter on 1-1. Press the [HI-G/F/Q] key. | | the LCD. If the output level is too high, the output will The menu to set the high frequencies of the equalizer distort. Adjust the Master Fader so it does not exceed 0 appears. on the L/R level meter. 1-2. Press the [MID-G/F/Q] key. The menu to set the mid frequencies of the equalizer PAN Adjustment appears. <Caution> 1:3. Press the [LO-G] key. If you must edit channel parameters such as setup of PAN The menu to set the low frequencies of the equalizer or EQ, be sure to check that the “Scene Sequence Mode, explained later, is switched “Off.” Should the parameters be edited with this “Scene Sequence Mode” switched “On,” the parameters will be returned to their original setting when the VF160EX is operated in PLAY or STOP. Refer to page 66 for “On/off of the Scene Sequence Mode.” appears. Select CH [RE L Press the [PAN] key. The PAN setup menu appears on the LCD. “Select CH!” will be flashes. Η- flashing 2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the channel intended for equalizer adjustments. The channel name and current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD. CRCRIRCRCRCRERZ2RZ]

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key ofthe channel

intended for PAN adjustment. The channel selected flashes, then the input signal and the current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD. fashing

3. Every time the [HI-G/F/Q] key or [MID-G/F/Q] key is

T|e 3 4 5 6 1 E flashing —L| pressed the parameter alternates from G (Gain) -> : o © © 9 © © Qo o F (Frequency)->Q (Characteristic Curve). Selectthe item 5 ID I Le 13 14 15 16 HST to adjust. © Q LIT LIT Only the G (Gain) can be adjusted for the low frequency DA BA A A A A A A equalizer ([ILO-G]key). Therefore, the item will not change by pressing the key.

3. Turn the [J 0G] dial to set the PAN level.

A graphic display of the PAN parameter appears on the LCD 4. Turn the [j 0G] dial to modify the parameter of the item to in real-time, adjust. à. To adjustotherchannels, press the [CH STATUSICH SEL] The EQ setting graphically appears on the LCD in real-time. key of that channel, then go to Step 3.

5. Press the [EXIT/NO] key when adjustments are

completed. The system returns to the Normal Display.

5. To adjust other items or another frequency range of the

7. When adjustments are completed, press the [EXIT/NO]key.

The system returns to the Normal Display. Effect Send Level Adjustment Tips: For fader-paired channels (set by the “Pair fader setting” menu in the Setup mode) controlling the level for one chan- nel affects both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders. L. Press the [CH PARAM EDIT-EFF1/EFF2] key. Every time the key is pressed the mode alternates between the ÉFFI1 and EFF2 menu. AES= EFEA E + CHI fashing A Ë 4 5 6 1 8 Ge) dei de) Ce) Ce) de) (er) 10 1 8 8 LA LS IE sr

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the channel

intended to adjust the effect send level. The channel name and current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD. Press the [MASTER CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to adjust the master send level. L'fashing fiashing +

3. Turn the [J 0G] dial to set the effect send level.

key of that channel.

5. When adjustments are completed, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The system returns to the Normal Display. Modifying EffectType 1-1. Press the [EFF EDIT-EFF1] key. The effect 1 selection menu appears along with the currently set effect type. Eff Leuel = £f Feu Time = 3.15 Pre Delas = 4bms Hi_ Ratio = Ë E“E Leuel = _Tt Exemple: Display when the [EFF EDIT-EFF1]key is pressed. 1-2. Press the [EFF EDIT-EFF2]key. The effect 2 selection menu appears along with the currently set e Double Time Osuble Lul Filter Example: Display when the IEFF EDIT-EFF2]key is pressed.

2. Turn the [J 0G] dial to select the effect type.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES]key.

The mode switches to the effect selected. Itis possible to adjust the parameters of the effect in this state. EFFI EDIT #LA1: Hor MUTE * [arr]

ion E“FR Level The parameter settings alternate every time the [EFF EDIT- EFF1] key or [EFF EDIT-EFF2] key is pressed. Turn the J 06] dial to modify the parameters. Only the effect type is modified here. For more details refer to a later section.

4. When adjustments are completed, press the [EXIT/NO]

key several times. The system returns to the Normal Display.

FostexX VAISOS< Create the master tape after adjusting all tracks. Start recording the piece with a master recorder (cassette tape, DAT, MD, etc.). The VF160EX can output S/P DIF (optical) digital signals making it is possible to directly mix down digital signals if the master recorder can input S/P DIF (optical) digital signals. Tips: Internal Mixdown Mode 1 The VF160EX features an “Internal mixdown mode”. By using the Internal mixdown mode, you can mix-down up to 16 tracks without using an external master recorder. Also, by using the built-in CD-R/RW drive, you can make your original audio CD from materials mixed-down by the Internal mixdown mode. See “Advanced Features” on page 79 for the Internal mixdown mode and “Save/load of Song Data” on page 125 for making an audio CD. Analog Mix Down

1. ConnecttheIN (inputjack) ofthe master recorder with the 2. Adjustthe recording level of the master recorder.

IST OUT-L/R] jack of the VF160EX.

3. Startrecording with the master recorder and then play the

song on the VF160EX from the beginning.

4. Stop both machines when recording is completed.

Tips: Fade IN/OUT The VF160EX Master Fader provides a feature to Fade IN (gradually increase the volume) or Fade OUT (gradually decrease the volume) the sound. Analog master recorder Digital Mix Down 1 Connectthe digital IN (input jack) of the master recorder 3. Fine tune the output level of the VF160EX master fader. with the [DIGITAL/DATA OUT] jack of the VF160E X. + _In General, the optimal level is when the level + Direct connection is possible if the master recorder meter of the master recorder is O at the maximum has a S/P DIF (optical) digital input. volume of VF160EX. Note that any level exceeding O may cause sound distortion. + _ Use the “Fostex COP-1/96kK” for connections if the master recorder has a S/P DIF (coaxial) digital input jack.

4. Startrecording with the master recorder and then play he

song on the VF160EX from the beginning.

5. Stop both machines when recording is successfully

completed. Tips: Fade IN/OUT The VF160EX Master Fader provides the feature to Fade IN (gradually increase the volume) or Fade OUT (gradually decrease the volume) the sound. Digital master recorder

2. Prepare the master recorder to accept digital input.

+ The sampling frequency of the VF1G60EX is 44.1KHz. Digital mix down is not possible unless the master recorder can record 44.1kHz digital signals. + Generally speaking, the input level of the master recorder is not adjustable for digital input.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Instructions for recording with BUSS RECORD This section will discuss the basic procedures to REC/PLAY with "BUSS" RECORD, which is another recording option. With DIRECT RECORD, the track recorded was determined according to the input of channel A to H. However, with BUSS RECORD), recording is possible regardless of the channel input. It is also possible to record the input of all 8 channels on 2 tracks with BUSS RECORD. Since the recording process takes place via the mixer, it is possible to apply equalizer and effect sound to the recording. Note that BUSS RECORD takes place using the REC exclusive "REC BUSS". This "REC BUSS" consists of 2 channels, L and R, therefore, a maximum of 2 tracks can be recorded at the same time. Description of BUSS RECORD BUSS RECORD takes place by sending signals processed through the mixer to the "REC BUS. Therefore, signals applied with equalization and built- Playback sound in effect can be recorded (added and recorded). =} = Here, we will use the channel (ORANGE) with an [IN- PUT] started with the fader as the source channel. However, channels (GREEN) in which [TRACKS] are started can also be used as a source channel. Ping-pong Playback sound VE recording is possible for the source channel recording = with the [TRACK] started channel (GREEN). Input signal = Note the following precautions for BUSS recording. =) RECORDER 1-16 Track Mix and record to 1 or 2 tracks WARNING! Of the ICH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch9-16, a channel with an "IN (nput)" which is lit up ORANGE, cannot output sound of the tracks corresponding to ch9 to16, soit is not possible to go to the READY state using the [BUSS-REC TRK] key. WARNING! Precautions for when selecting a source channel with the [BUSS-SOURCE] key. (when key is flashing in GREEN) + A channel in which the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key light is OFF is selectable. + The channel selected will either have à flashing ORANGE or GREEN [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key. + The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key that is flashing RED is a READY channel (track) and cannot be selected. WARNING! Precautions when selecting a REC track with the [BUSS-REC TRK] key. (key is flashing RED) + A channel in which the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key light is OFF is selectable. + The channel selected has a flashing RED [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key. + The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key that is flashing ORANGE or GREEN is selected as a source channel, therefore, it cannot be selected.

FostexX VAISOS< Recording the H Input Signal to Track 1 Here we will record a sound source connected to input H on track 1 of the recorder. Beforehand, set the ch1 to 16 channel faders, master fader and the [TRIM] for A to H to 0. Connect a headphone or speaker to monitor the sound. Preparing to Record [1 | Connectthe sound source to record to [INPUT] jack H. [4 Ba press the [BUSS-SOURCE] key (GREEN: Flashing). display to select the source channel sent 10 REC BUSS HE Press the INPUT SEL] key (ORANGE: Flashing). a SELECT SOURCE ! à Sun Blel=lelelel=l= le) D ON di de 13 à 15 H EH OO0000000 Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key for ch16 so the key E Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch16 (ORANGE: starts "flashing ORANGE (=INPUT)". Flashing). The following display appears, and the signals of input The signals of input H started with the fader of ch16 is H will start for channel 16. sent to REC BUSS. SELECT INPUT ETRACE !

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Itis possible to apply effect to the input signals by setting EFF1 or EFF2 to the source at the same time. Details are described later. Note> The channel signal sent to REC BUSS (ch16 in this cast are not directly output from the stereo OUT L/R chan- nels. It will be output from the stereo OUT L/R chan- nels with che track recorded set to the input monitor mode, with later procedures. Press the [BUSS-REC TRK]key (RED: Flashing). The display to select the REC track appears. REGLUL <Note> When the signals of input H are started with the ch16 fader, it will not be possible to listen to the play sound of the track. Therefore, it is prohibited to put track 16 in the READY (REC) mode. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch 1 (RED: Flashing). Track 1 will go to the "RDY (Ready)" state, and allow the input signal of source channel H to be recorded to track REGCLUL EPrress the EXITNOJkey to retum to the Normal Display. Tips: Changing the recording mode To change the BUSS recording mode to the DIRECT re- cording mode, press the [DIRECT-REC TRK]key while the tracks to be directly recorded are selected in the step above. "Rec Mode Change!" appears and "Sure?" flashes on the screen. Fec Mode Chanse! 12346608 AiDie3iMiSiG dE LR ing the [ENTER/ES] key cancels the selection of tracks for the BUSS recording and changes the display to the track selection screen for the DIRECT record- ing.

Adjusting the Source Channel [9] Press the [RECORD] key, then set track 1 to the input monitor ((RECORD]Key: RED Flashing). Sound for monitoring purposes can be heard from the headphones or speakers from this point. Adjust the volume of the monitor sound with the [MON OUT] or [PHONES]knob. [10] Setthe ch1 fader, ch16 fader and master fader to “0”. [11] Check the sound source and adjustthe [TRIM] 8/16/H to an appropriate gain. The guideline for optimal gain is when the [PEAK]LED is just about to light up when the sound source is turned up to the maximum volume. [12] Accordingly,equalize the signals of ch16 being recorded. Tips: Equalizing the Source Channel Press the [HI-G/F/Q] key, [MID-G/F/Q] key or [LO-G] key and switch to channel parameter edit EQ edit mode to equalize the source channel to record. Then, press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch16 to adjust the sound with a customized equalizati more details refer to "Adjusting the E qu: [13] The final REC level (REC BUSS Master Level) is adjusted according to the following instructions. After adjusting the master level, press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display. Tips: Adjusting the REC BUSS Master Level Turn the [j 0G] dial with the system showing the fol- lowing display to make the final adjustments for the REC BUSS Master Level. Press the [BUSS-REC TRK] key once more to switch to this display from the Normal Display. The default setting of the REC BUSS Master Level is fac- tory preset to level "80". Use the ÿ 0G]dial to turn the REC LVL] knob on the LCD as shown below, and adjust the number setting in real-time, The REC BUSS Master Level can also be adjusted (adjustable range: 00-99). REC BUSS Master Level adjustment icon SEL_FEC RH CEUSS Rec à à à à à © D 10 1ù 12 13 14 IS H REC BUSS Master Level appears Tips: Adjusting the PAN Setting ofthe Source Channel When recording on one track with the BUSS RECORD option, the PAN setting of the source channel is either fixed to the left or right. If the REC track is an odd number, the source channel PAN is fixed all the way to the left. If the REC track is an even number, the source channel PAN is fixed all the way to the right. The source channel PAN can be op- tionally set ONLY when there are two REC tracks set.

FostexX VAISOS< Recording Play L Locate the time to start recording on the VF160EX.

2. Press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is

depressed to start recording. The CH STATUS/CHSEL]key and [RECORDJkey of ch1 lights up RED, indicating that recording is taking place.

3. Press the [STOP]key when recording is completed, to

stop the VF160EX. "Please Wait’ will appear on the LCD, then return to the Normal Display. These procedures complete the instructions to record to track 1 with the BUSS recording option. Recording 8 INPUTSs to Tracks 7 and 8

1. Locate the time in which recording was started (REC start

2. Press the [PLAY] key to check the sound recorded.

The ch1 fader can be used to adjust the play level. The signals recorded on track 1 can be checked. Tips: UNDO/REDO By pressing the [UNDO/REDO]key after recording, the record- ing is undone and the track returns to the pre-REC state where there is no recording (UNDO). By pressing the [UNDO/ REDO]key again, the recording on track is redone to the post- REC state (REDO). Here we will record all 8 sound sources connected to inputs A to H to tracks 7 and 8 of the recorder.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Preparing to Record Adjusting the Source Channel [1 | Connectto the [INPUT] jack the sound source to record. Mprress tre INPUT SEL key. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch9-16 to switch ch 9-16 to "INPUT", Ch9-16 is ready to start signals of input A to H. T INPUT/TRACK!

Note> If input signals are started for ch9-16 faders, the play sounds of the corresponding track can no longer be heard and you cannot go to the READY (REC) state. [4 | Press the [BUSS-SOURCE] key. (GREEN: Flashing) Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL]key ofch 9-16. (ORANGE: Flashing) Signals of input A to H can now be sent to REC BUSS. E Press the [BUSS-REC TRK] key (RED: Flashing). Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch7 and 8 (RED: Flashing). Track 7 and 8 will proceed to the "RDY (Ready)" state. E Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display.

Press the [RECORD] key and settracks 7 and 8 to the input monitor (RED: Flashing). As in the earlier case, the monitor sound is output at this stage. Adjust the volume of the monitor sound with the [MON OUT] or [PHONES]knob. ET] setthe ch7&8 fader, ch9-16 fader and master fader to 0. Output the sound of the sound source to record and adjust the [TRIM]to an appropriate gain. The guideline for optimal gain is when the [PEAK] LED is about to light when the sound source is turned up to the maximum volume, [12] Accordingly, equ the signals of ch9-16 being recorded and/or adjustthe PAN according to the sound source. Refer to the earlier section for instructions on adjusting the equalizer, : Adjusting the PAN Setting ofthe Source Channel possible to set the PAN according to the sound source of the source channel when recording to two tracks. Press the [PAN]key to switch to the PAN setting display. Select the channel to adjust the PAN setting with the [CH STATUS/CH SEL]key. Then use the [J 0G] dial to optionally set the PAN setting. The final REC Level (REC BUSS Master Level) is adjusted according to the earlier mentioned procedures. The system is ready to record after you have completed the above procedures. Record 1 Locate the time to record on theVF160EX.

2. Press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is

depressed to start recording. The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key and the [RECORD] key of ch7& 8 lights up RED, indicating that recording is taking place. Press the [STOP]key when the recording is completed, to stop the VF160EX. "Please Wait” appears on the LCD and then returns to the Normal Display.

This completes recording the sound source of inputs À to Hon tracks 7 and 8. Tips: UNDO/REDO By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after recording, the recording is undone and the track returns to the pre- REC state where there is no recording (UNDO). By press- ing the [UNDO/REDO] key again, the recording on two tracks are redone to the post-REC state (REDO). The UNDO/REDO feature is available for all recordings. Play 1 Locate the time in which recording was started (REC start time).

2. Press the [PLAY] key to play the VF160EX.

Adjust the play level of tracks 7 and 8 with the ch7 & 8 faders to check (listen to) the sound recorded.

FostexX VAISOS< Tips: Applying an Effect on the Source Channel Itis possible to apply effect sound on the source channel during BUSS RECORD. L.EFF1orEFF2 can also be selected atthe same time for the source channel from the display (appears by pressing the [IBUSS SOURCE] key) to selectthe source channel, as described earlier. The following figure shows the example where input H and EFF1 are both applied to the source channel, and allows EFFECT 1 to be applied to the input H signals. SELECT SOURCE ! (a à à à à à DT

the send level of effect 1. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch16, select input H and use the [J0G] dial to adjust the send level of input H. The signal level adjusted here is sent to effect 1. To adjust the master send level, use the [CH STATUS/ CHSEL]key of the master channel to select the master send level and adjust it with the [J OG]dial.

3. Press the [EFF EDIT-EFF1] key, select the effect type

desired and then edit the effect parameter. ti is possible to apply the selected effect on the sound

MUTE: FF] #La1: Horn HALLE Eff Level Er] Eeu Time = 3,55 Pre Delas ms Hi_ Fatio Ë E“R Level = 75 sible to apply different effects (EFF1/EFF2) on multiple source channels by individually tuning the signal level sent to EFFECT1/EFFECT2, upon adjust- ing the above effect send level.

Chapter 3 Advanced mixer operations

This section describes practical operations of the mixer including functions that are not described in "Basic opera- tions" as well as detailed information about settings. en the power is turned o When you turn the power on, the VF160EX shows the start-up display ("FOSTEX" -> "Initial." -> "Current DR", "IDE" -> "FormatType" ['Standard" or "Quick"]), and then becomes ready. In this condition, only the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key, [STOP] key, [EFF 1] key, and [EFF 2] key light on the panel, while the display looks as shown below. In this manual, we refer to this display as the "Normal display", in which you can see the current recorder position is at the beginning (ABS OOM 00) of the program 1 (PO1). CRETE POLINOGO 1 Sbiinit MixE Light in green Light in green Light in green le the Normal display is show Fader Adat Mixer Mode (Input monitoring of all tracks) The fader for each channel (1 through 16) controls the In the normal display mode, every time the [INPUT SEL] level of TRACK or INPUT signal fed to the stereo output or key is pressed with the [SHIFT]key depressed down, the the Rec busses. If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, Adat Mixer Mode will alternately switch on/off. The in- the fader on the odd channel controls both channel lev- put monitor (READY) of all tracks will simultaneously els. The master fader controls the total level of the stereo switch on/off. The Adat Mixer Mode is a convenient for output busses. example when recording by connecting a VF1G6O0EX to a . personal computer installed with an adat optical sound Channel mute and Solo function card. In this way, the VF160EX can be used in four roles: In the Normal display, pressing a [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key As an AUDIO track monitor mixer (using faders of ch1-8). mutes the corresponding channel. The [CH STATUS/CH As an AD (the level adjusted by [TRIM] is possible in low SEL] key for the muted channel is unlit. latency monitoring). Pressing the key again releases muting and lights the key. As a monitor mixer (using faders ch9-16). If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one of Asa 16MTR for simultaneous recording of all of these roles. the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key for the two channels mutes Refer to page 95. both channels. + To use the VFL60EX in the Adat Mixer Mode, the SETUP mode Also, pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key while holding digital input/digital output setting must be first set to "adat." down chelS#irTl key alternates on and off of the solo for « Tracks set to "IN Input)" by "INPUT SEL" cannot be changed ê S to READY. Master channel mute + This function is effective only for executing DIRECT recording While the Normal display is show pressing a [CH STATUS, and will not function for BUSS recording. CHSEL] key for the master Channel mutes the stereo out- If you execute the above while in BUSS recording, the VF1G0EX put signals. The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the master will want to select a different recording mode. ‘Rec Mode Changel”" channel is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting will be displayed and Sure? will flash. At this point, if the : IENTER/YES] key is pressed, simultaneous with change in the and lights the key. recording mode, the Adat Mixer Mode will switch on. If the [EXIT/ No] key is pressed, the BUSS recording mode can be continued.

FOsteX VAFISOS annel Parameter Edit You can edit the various parameter settings such as pan and equalizers for channels 1 through 16 and the master channel. We refer this type of editing as "Channel parameter edit”. There are several channel parameter edit keys on the top panel (as shown below) and pressing the dedicated key for the parameter you want to edit brings up the corresponding edit screen. Some keys also handle the second parameter (labeled under the key) and you can bring up the corresponding edit screen by pressing the key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. You can view and/or edit the following parameters. <Caution> ereuerr2 «Pan setting +3-band equalizer setting +Effect send level setting +Pre/post selection ofthe effect send + Aux (auxiliary) send level setting +Pre/post selection ofthe Aux (auxiliary) send +Compressor setting +Fader level setting + Channel view (viewing only)

<Hints> If a channel whose source is set to INPUT via the IN- PUT SEL setting is selected as the edit channel, the channel name is shown as below. In the following example, channel 9 which is set to INPUT, is selected as the edit channel. Flashing Adjusting Pan You can adjust the pan (or balance) of each input chan- nel signal fed to the stereo outputs, as well as fed to the Rec buss outputs. The panpot for master channel con- trols the L/R level balance of the stereo outputs. L Press the [PAN] key. All channel settings are shown on the screen. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel elected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen (as shown in the drawing of step 2 below).

If you must edit channel param- eters such as setup of PAN or EQ, be sure to check that the "Scene Sequence Mode”, explained later, is switched "Off. Should the pa- rameters be edited with this "Scene Sequence Mode" switched "On", the parameters will be re- turned to their original setting when VF160EX is operated in PLAY or STOP. Refer to page 66 for "On/offofthe Scene Sequence Mode”. (es) auaaue

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The icon for the selected channel is flash- ing, indicating that you can edit it. Flashing—|

3. Use the [J 0G] dial to adjust panning.

Rotating the [J 06] dial to the left or right moves the pan position to the left or right respectively. The following show examples of the pan settings. 0 de) Es k4 LA FE Pan position: Pan position: Pan position: center hard left hard right “<Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel ‘Available values L10 (hard left) through C (center) to R1O (hard right) (the default setting: "C" for all channels)

• Values are displayed between L10 and R10 in 21 steps but the actual pan setting is changed smoothly and continuously as rotating the [ 06] dial.

4. To setanother channel's pan, repeat steps 2 and 3 above.

5. After completing pan editing, press the [E XIT/NO] key.

The VFLGOEX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display.

EN VFISOE< FOStEX Adjusting EQ The VF160EX provides a 3-band equalizer section in- cluding HI, MID and LO bands. You can control G (gain), F (frequency) and Q for HI and MID equalizers, while only G (gain) for LO. <Note> Ifchannels 13-14 or 15-16 are specified as the com- pressor channels via "Setting the compressor chan- nels"in the Setup mode, you cannot apply the equal- izer to those channels. If you press a [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the compressor channel, a warning mes- sage ("Can'‘tSelect!”) flashes and the operation is can- celled. In the screen example shown below, the com- pressor is applied to channels 13-14. Flashing—| L Press the [HI-G/F/Q] (or [MID-G/F/Q] or [LO-G]) key. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel (Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the en as shown in the drawing of step 2 below. L}—iashing (x CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators for the compressor ) channels do not flash. L J)

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The gain value flashes, indicating that you can edit it. Flashing— | {Iftwo adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one | of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for these channels se- lects both channels and you can adjust EQ for both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of ad- | jacent two channels.

The following shows an example for editing the HI EQ!s gain, The curve corresponding to the setting value is graphically shown. Setting this directly affects the sound. Settng value — | —Curve By rotating the [J 0G] dial, you can set each parameter to the desired value within the range shown below. “Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel. You cannot equalize channels 13-14 or 15-16 if they are set as the compressor channels via the Setup mode. ‘Available parameters and setting ranges: (HI-G/F/H) G (gain): -18 dB to FLAT to +18 dB (default: FLAT) F (frequency): 500 Hz to 20.2 kHz (default: 4.00 kHz) @ LPF, HS, 0.1 to 20 (default: H-S) ON/OFF: ON or OFF (default: ON) (MID-G/F/H) G (gain): -18 dB to FLAT to +18 dB (default: FLAT) F (frequency): 500 Hz to 20.2 kHz (default: 1.00 kHz) @ LPF, HS, 0.1 to 20 (default: 1.0) ON/OFF: ON or OFF (default: ON) (Lo-6) G (gain): -18 dB to FLAT to +18 dB (default: FLAT) fixed to 400 Hz (effective frequency: 100 Hz) fixed to LS ON or OFF (default: ON) *LPF: low pass filter *H-$: hi-shelving *L-S: low-shelving F (frequen

4. To editthe EQ for another channel, repeat step 1 through

5. After completing EQ editing, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF160EX exits the EQ edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN Controlling Effect send level Selecting pre/post of Effect sends You can control send levels of channels 1 through 16 (pre- or post-fader) to the two internal A.S.P. effect processors. The master channel controls the effect send master level. L Press the [EFF1/EFF2] key to bring up the effect send level screen. Each time you press the [EFFLEFF2]key, the EFF1 send level and EFF2 send level screens alternate. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the hown in the drawing of step 2 below).

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The icon for the selected channel is flashing, indicating that you can edit it. Flashing—| [If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for these channels se- lects both channels and you can adjust levels for both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of ad- |jacent two channels.

3. Use the [J 0G] dial to control the send level.

The numeric value and the marker position of the rotary pot icon change according to the current level. <Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16 and the master level. ‘Available values: 00 to 99 (dB), (the default setting: channels 1 through 16: “00”, master level: “80”)

4. To set another channel's send level, repeat steps 2 and 3

5. After completing send level editing, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display.

You can select whether the pre-fader or post-fader sig- nal is sent from each channel (1 to 16) to the effect processor. If you select "Post", the signal adjusted by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor is also lowered. If you select "Pre", the signal that is not affected by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor, so even if you lower the channel fader to minimum, the signal can be sent to the effect processor. L Press the [EFF1/EFF2] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. Each time you press the [EFFEFF2] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, the pre/post selection screens for EFF1 and EFF2 alternate. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen (as shown in the drawing of step 2 below).

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The icon for the selected channel is flashing, indicating that you can edit it. Flashing—| If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one of the [CH STATUS/CH SELJkeys for these channels selects both channels and you can set PRE or POST for both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of adjacent two channels.

3. Use the [J 0G] dial to switch the selection.

The icon color and label changes according to the selection, as shown below. M [Te pre-fader signal is sent to the effect pro- FRE |cessor. Q |The post-fader signal is sent to the effect pro- FST |cessor. <Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16. ‘Available options: PRE or PST (post), (default: all channels: “PST”)

4. To set another channel's pre/post selection, repeat steps

5. After completing the pre/post selection, press the [E XIT/

NO] key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display. Controlling AUX SE ND level You can control send levels of channels 1 through 16 (pre- or post-fader) from the [AUX SEND] jack on the rear panel. The master channel controls the AUX send master level. L Press the [AUX1/AUX2]key to bring up the AUX send level screen. Each time you press the [AUX1/AUX2] key, the AUX1 send level and AUX? send level screens alternate. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen (as shown in the drawing of step 2 below). Flashing

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The icon for the selected channel is flashing, indicating that you can edit it. Trk 1:98 +-Flashing Flashing — ES) —| (Eu (IE Ein Ein [If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one ) of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for these channels selects both channels and you can adjust levels for both chan- nels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of adjacent two channels. C J Use the [J 0G] dial to control the send level. The numeric value and the marker position of the rotary pot icon change according to the current level. ("80", the default value, is the reference level.)

“Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16 and the master level. ‘Available values: 00 to 99 (dB), (the default setting: channels 1 through 16: “00”, master level: “807)

4. To set another channel's send level, repeat steps 2 and

5. After completing send level editing, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display. Selecting pre/post of AUX sends You can select whether the pre-fader or post-fader sig- nal is fed from each channel (1 to 16) to the [AUX SEND] jack. If you select "Post", the signal adjusted by the chan- nel fader is sent to the effect processor, so if you lower the channel fader, the signal sent to the effect proces- sor is also lowered. If you select "Pre", the signal that is not affected by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor, so even if you lower the channel fader to minimum, the signal can be sent to the effect processor.

1. Press the [AUX1/AUX2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to bring up the pre/post selection screen. Each time you press the [AUX1/AUX2] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, the pre/post selection screens for EFF1 and EFF? alternate. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the een (as shown in the drawing of step 2 below). DL }—Fiashing

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. The current settings are shown, together with the selected channel name. The icon for the selected channel is flashing, indicating that you can edit it. Flashing [If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pr of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL]keys for these channels s both channels and you can set PRE or POST for both channels simultancously, See page 146 for details about {how to pair faders of adjacent two channels.

3. Use the [J 0G]dial to switch the selection.

The icon color and label changes according to the selection, as shown below. M ne pre-fader signal is fed to the AUX SEND FRE [iack. Qi | The post-fader signal is fed to the AUX SEND FST |jack. <Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16. ‘Available options: PRE or PST (post) (default: all channel “PST”)

4. To setanother channel's pre/post selection, repeat steps

5. After completing the pre/post selection, press the

[EXIT/ NO] key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display. Controlling fader levels You can control fader levels for channels 1 through 16 and the master channel while viewing the numeric values. L Press the [PAN] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The current fader positions for all channels are shown both graphically and numerically. STATTATT

2. Use the desired fader to control the channel level.

The fader position shown on the screen (both graphically and numerically) changes according to the actual fader position in real-time. “Controllable channels: Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel ‘Available values: 00 to 99 (The value is displayed by a whole number but the actual signal level is changed smoothly and continuously.) If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, the fader for the odd channel controls levels for both channels simul- taneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair fad- ers of adjacent two channels.

3. After completing fader level setting, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display. Setting the compressor You can apply the built-in compressor only to the chan- nels selected by "Compressor channel setting" in the Setup mode. <Compressor function> The compressor is used to compress the dynamic range of the input signal. If the input signal exceeds a given level (the threshold level), the gain is decreased as the input signal level increases, to reduce the dynamic range of the output signal. <Hints> You can apply the built-in compressor only to channels 13 through 16 and the master channel. You can select the channels to be compressed between channel 13-14 and 15-16 by using "Compressor channel setting” in the Setup mode. You can apply the compressor to the master channel anytime regardless of the compressor channel setting. See the detailed information on page 148 for the Setup mode. <Note> You cannot apply the equalizer to the input channels that the compressor is applied to. However, You can apply both the equalizer and compressor to the master channel. The following operations are assumed that the compres- sor is applied to channels 13 and 14. L Press the [HI-G/F/Q] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The compressor setting screen appears. The message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators for the master channel and input channels (13-14 or 15-16) to which the compressor is applied flash. PT Fieshing FATIO 5:1 FITHCK Sms 71 GAIN __6.0de Jf"

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired

channel. You can now edit parameters of the compressor for the channel. LEF]

GAIH 6. dE 4 If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing one of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for these channels applies the compressors to both channels simultaneously. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of ad- jacent two channels.

3. Press the [HI-G/F/Q] key to selectthe desired parameter,

and enter the desired value using the [J 0G] dial. Each time you press the [HI-G/F/Q]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, the parameters to be edited are cycled between "THSHD" (threshold level), "RATIO", "ATTACK" (attack time), "GAIN" and "ON/OFF" (compressor on/off). For each parameter, rotating the [J 0G] dial can set the following values. “Channels to be selected Channels 13-14, 15-16 and the master channel ‘Available values Threshold level: 0.0 dB to -50.0 dB (in 0.5 dB increments) (The default setting: 13-14/15-16->-20dB, mas 25dB) Ratio: - 1,31, 1,20:1, 10:1, 8:1, 6:1, 5:1, 4:1, 2.5:1,2:1,1.7:1,1 n 1,1.1:1,1 (The default settings: 13-14/15-16-> 10:1, master -> 4:1) Attack time: 5 ms to 75 ms (in 1 ms increments) (The default settings: 13-14/15-16 -> “60ms”, master - > “8ms”) Gain: 0.0 dB to +18.0 dB (in 0.5 dB increments) (The default settings: 13-14/15-16/master -> 0.0 dB.) Compressor on/off: On, Off (The default is “Off.”)

After completing the parameter setting, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display. r \ <Hints> If you try to select a channel to which the compressor cannot be applied, a warning message ("Can'tSelect!"') will flash and the operation will be cancelled. The following screen shows that you can apply the com- pressor to channels 13-14 and the master channel. Channel view You can see the current setting information for chan- nels 1 through 16 via the Channel view screen. [ 1) Channel on/off

3) Send levels and pre/post selections for EFF1,EFF2,

Press the [LO-G]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The channel view screen appears. The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen, the message prompting to select a channel ("Select CH!") flashes, as well as all the CH STATUS/CH SEL indicators on the panel flash. From the second time on, the screen shows the status information of the previously selected channel when bringing up the screen (as shown in the drawing of step 2 below). Flash Etionl#errt stne[ [Select CHIL EE lecrre EE Fanfan: Fégioneaure

Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the desired channel. The current setting information is shown, together with the channel name.

The screen example above shows the following status. [if two adjacent channels are fader-paired, when pre ing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL]key for the even channel, the fader icon in the figure shown in step 3 above is shown in dotted line. See page 146 for details about how to pair faders of ad- jacent two channels. 1 Channel 1 is currently selected. The channel is on. The channel fader is set to "O0" (-«). The pan is in the center position. The signal is fed to ST OUT (L/R). The post-fader signal of the selected channel is fed to EFF1, EFF2, AUXI and AUX2 at level 80. w—olu|e|wln

3. To turn off the channel view screen, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The VF160EX exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN The VF160EX offers high quality ambient effects by employing the A. S. P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology), which is exclusively developed by Fostex. With the A. S. P., you can obtain an incomparably clean and high density Hall Reverb, overwhelmingly clear Room Reverb and wonderfully hi-fidelity Plate Reverb. In addition to these typical Reverbs, the VF160EX provides not only various practical algorithms such as Delay, Chorus, Flanger and Pitch Bend, but some combinations of these are also available, e.g., Delay+Reverb. *A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology) The A. S. P. is an exclusive new digital effect processing technology designed by Fostex. This method extracts maximum efficiency from the limited DSP power. It achieves an overwhelmingly high density Early Reflection sound and wonder- fully smooth High Dump response through the H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algo- rithm). Also, it carries out an elaborate reverb simulation with clear sounds through the H. D. L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing), which eliminates the mutual interference between the numerous integrated delay modules and reduce the impurity and girt of the sound. ( AS. P

DANCE SIGNAL PROCESSING

*H.F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm) There is one of indispensable elements in the natural echo called “Early Reflection Sound,” which is usually sacrificed in commercial reverb products in order to reduce costs. (In practice, the Early Reflec- tion Sound means the very first reverberated sound that bounces back from walls, floors and ceilings of concert halls). The entire reverb sound quality depends on this Early Reflection Sound and how closely it can resemble the real echo. The H. F. A. is an algorithm that enables the effect unit to reproduce a clear and natural Early Reflection Sound by applying an ideal harmonic feedback to each delay module. *H, D. L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing) The reverb sounds consist of lots of small delay elements combined in a complex way, which are pro- duced by many delay modules inside the effect unit. In order to obtain smooth and comfortable reverb sounds, it is very important to efficiently organize the relationship between each delay module and minimize negative mutual interference. The H. D. L. P. is a technology which applies efficient logarith- mic processing to each delay module, so that they can work in the most efficient way in order to elimi- nate harmful reverb elements and roughness. This makes it possible to establish high density and transparent sounds. Before the operation, we will briefly discuss the effect functions here such as Reverb, Delay, Chorus, and Flanger, which are integrated in the VF1GOEX. The so called Reverb effect consists of various reflec- tion sounds mixed together. For example, when you clap your hands in a tunnel, you will hear the sound linger even after you stop clapping your hands. This is the Reverb. The sounds we normally hear in daily life have three types of sounds mixed together, i.e., “Direct sound,” “Early Reflection sound” and “Late Reflection sound.” The Direct sound means the sound directly reaches the ears from the sound source. The Early Reflection sound means the sound that comes after the Direct sound and has rebound off the wall of the tunnel up to a few times. The Late Reflection sound means that the sound rebounds many times long after the Direct sound has disappeared. Our ears normally hear the “Direct sound” - “Early Reflection sound” - “Late Re- flection sound” in the order.

This is the effect to added a delayed sound to the original sound. You can obtain a richer sound or com- pletely change the original source sound by using the Delay. This makes the one original sound appear to have many sources. The Chorus is used to widen or thicken the original sound. The Flanger is one of applications of the Delay. This is used to create a sound like a jet airplane as- cending or descending.

EN VFISOE< FOStEX About the effect types The VF160EX contains two independent DSP multi-effect units; EFF 1 and EFF 2. A variety of effect types are preset for each effect unit. By selecting a suitable effect type, you can process the sound as you wish. You can also edit the parameters of the selected effect type to create your own effect sounds. The following 28 effect types are preset for EFF 1. The 38 effect types shown on the next page are provided for EFF 2, and these include the same 28 effect types as EFF 1. Effect types preset for EFF 1 Name Parameter type Explanation LO1| Norm HALL REVERB Standard hall reverb; detailed and transparent, with a moderate amount of early reflections. LO2| Pres HALL REVERB Hall reverb with presence and definition LO3| Wet HALL REVERB Hall reverb with restrained high-frequency and a refreshing atmosphere. LO4| NoER HALL REVERB All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and even decay of all frequencies. LOS] Lo-F HALL REVERB Hall reverb with lingering low-frequency reverberation. L06| STADIUM REVERB Stadium reverb characterized by long early reflections. LO7| AUDITRIUM REVERB Reverb simuleting an auditorium with suppressed reverberation: LO8| HALL WAY REVERB Reverb with a long pre-delay, creating the impression of an extended space. L09| Norm ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating a moderate space with some sparkle L10| Dead ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating à narrow and dead room. Adding à slight amount will give warmth to the sound. L11) Pres ROOM REVERB Al-purpose room reverb, with good definition and few early reflections L12 DrumBOOTH | REVERB Room reverb simulting à drum booth. L13| GARAGE REVERB Room reverb simulating a narrow and live space like a garage, with crisp presence. L14| NormPLATE REVERB Modem-sounding plate reverb with wide bandwidth L15| Old PLATE REVERB Standard plate reverb with the character of older plate units. L16| PresPLATE REVERB Plate reverb with good definition and extended high-frequencies L17| Wet PLATE REVERB Plate reverb with a gente character. L18 DigiPLATE REVERB Plate reverb that emphasizes à digital character, with metal eaniy reflections L19| NornVOCAL REVERB All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and uniform decay at all frequencies L20|PresVOCAL REVERB Short reverberation with extended high frequency is added to the early reflections of an ideal vocal booth. Since this adds sparkle to the sound, it is effective when you wish to bring the vocal to the forefront. L21|SoloVOCAL REVERB Plate-like reverb is added to a spacious short delay. This blends well with any genre of music. L22| Arena VOC REVERB Gentie reverb is added to spacious stadium-type early refiections. L23| Arena CHO REVERB Short reverb with extended high frequency is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections. Effective on chorus parts. L24| KARAOKE REVERB Al-purpose reverb (karaoke style) that makes any vocal sound professional. L25| MnDL-HALL DLY4REVERB | A combined effect of mono delay and hall reverb L26| MnDL-PLT DLY4REVERB | A combined effect of mono delay and plate reverb. L27|PnDL-HALL DLY4REVERB | A combined effect of panning delay and hall reverb L28|PnDL-PLT DLY4REVERB | A combined effect of panning delay and plate reverb.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN Effect types preset for EFF 2 Name [ Parametertype |] Explanation LOL — | 1-28 are the same effecttypes as the EFF 1 presets listed on the preceding page. (For details refer to the preceding page.) L23 L29| MonoDELAY DELAY Mono delay L30| PanDELAY DELAY Panning delay L31| MonoBpmDL | BPMDELAY Mono delay. Specify BPM and note value to setthe delay time. L32] PanBpmDL BPM DELAY Panning delay. Specify BPM and note value to setthe delay time. L33| ShortDL SHORT DELAY | Short delay that allows you to setthe delay time precisely. L34| DOUBLING DOUBLING Doubling that allows you to set separate delay times for Land R L35] CHORUS CHORUS Produces a chorus effect À doubling effect can also be added’ L36] FLANGE FLANGE Produces a flanging effect. L37| MonoPITCH MONO PITCH | Pitch shift adjustable in a +2 octave range. L38| DIyPITCH DELAY PITCH | Pitch shift with a feedback delay, allowing strange effects to be produced. < Note: Changing the effect preset may mute the sound momentarily! > Effect presets of the internal effect processor shown above are classified into three types; ambience/ delay type (No.1 through 28), modulation/pitch type (No.29 through 36) and pitch type (No.37 and 38). If you switch the effect preset between the three types above, the audio is momentarily muted. Selecting the effect type Here's how to select the effect type for EFF 1 or EFF 2. ÉFFEDIT EFFL EFF2 Press this to setthe effecttype Press this to setthe effecttype forEFF 1. for EFF 2 F =

• As described earlier in "Basic Recording and Play back," raise the CHANNEL fader of a channel to which a signal is being input and raise the MASTER fader, so that the sound is heard at an appropriate level.

• As described earlier in "Setting the effect send level," raise the EFF 1 SEND level or the EFF 2 SEND level for the channel(s) to which you wish to apply the effect. L.If you wish to set EFF 1, press the EFF EDIT mode IEFF 1]key. To setEFF 2, press the [EFF 2] key. With the initial settings, the following displays will appear. When the [EFF 1] key is pressed: With the initial settings, “LOL: Norm HALL” will appear. MUTE : [arr] #ÆLA 1: Horn { Eff Level | feu Time Pre Delas Hi_ Fatio E“F Leuel

When the [EFF 2] key is pressed: With the initial settings, “L35: CHORUS” will appear.

Double Time dûms Double Lul ag Filter = FF

2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select the effect type.

The effect types listed in the foregoing tables will appear in succession. When an effect type appears, it will be blinking. The blinking indicates that the effect type has not yet been selected. 3.Press the [ENTER/YES] key. The effect type will be finalized, and the parameter setting screen will appear. The default (initial) parameter values will be displayed. MUTESs LoFF] Flashing

Pre Delas Hi_ Fatio E“F Level Details on the parameters are given in the following section, "Parameter settings."

4. To exit Effect Edit mode, press the [E XIT/NO] key twice in

succession. You will return to Normal display.

For details on the meaning and range of each parameter, refer to "Effect parameter details" on the below.

4. 1f you wish to adjust another parameter, repeat from

5. When you are finished making settings, press the

[EXIT/NO] key twice to exit Effect Edit mode. displayed, press the [EFF 1] key (or the [EFF 2] key) twice. One of the parameters of that effect type will appear. Muting an effect

EFFI EDIT COR SEE [FF]

(“LéliHorm HALL | 2 FE ime You can mute the effect sound of effect 1 or effect 2. freshing ‘To mute the effect sound:

É Pre Delss ECTÉ Hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [EFF 1] key (or ER Level = 75 FF ZIK The effect sound of effect 1 (or effect 2) will be muted, and

2. Press the [EFF 1] key (or the [EFF 2] key) several times

the dry sound will be heard. When muting is on, the [EFF 1] key (or EFF 2]key) LED is off. to display the desired parameter. The parameters that appear will differ, depending on the effect type that is selected. To cancel muting: MILITE: [arr] Once again hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the +L81:Horm HALL [EFF 1] key (or [EFF 2] key). Eff Leuel = £5ÿ The dry sound will change back to the effect sound. ju 1 = When mute is turned off, the [EFF 1] key (or [EFF 2] key) LED Flashing is off. 1 atig = E“F Leusl = Tÿ Effect parameter details The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the parameter type. Reverb effect parameters (parameter type: REVERB) For effect types 1--24 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted. 1--9.9 seconds reverberation begins. Range: 0--100 ms 1.EffLevel Adjust the effect return level: 0-99 2.RevTime Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0 3.Pre Delay Adjust the time from the original sound un 4.Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range S.E/R Level Adjust the volume of the early reflections. Range: 0--99 Delay-reverb effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY+REVERB) For effect types 25--28 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted. 1.EffLevel Adjust the effect return level: 0-99 2.DelayTime Adjust the delay time: Range: 1-230 ms

3. Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range:

Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0-10 Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9-L1, OFF, H1-H9

• L1-L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)
• H1-H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

• If the delay time exceeds 680ms, “!” is shown. 3.Note Select the note value for the delay. Range: 24, 16, 8T, 16...8, 4T, 8. 4, 2T, 4., 2, 2.,1

• 24= 16th note sextuplets, 16 = 16th notes, 8T = 8th note triplets, 16. = dotted sixteenth notes, = 8th notes, 4T = quarter note triple! otted eighth notes, 4 = quarter notes, 2T = half-note triplets, 4. = dotted quarter notes, 2= half notes
• The "." shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a dotted note.
• The "T" shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a triplet. 4.Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0-99 (100 steps in increments of 1) 5.Fikter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9-L1, OFF, H1-H9
• L149 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)
• H1-H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency) Tips:To reflect the tempo map setting to parameters The BPM parameter value set by effect types 31 and 32 can be set in a range between 30 and 250. You can reflect the tempo value set by "Setting the tempo map" in the SETUP mode to this BPM parameter. Therefore, you do not have to use the scene memory for changing the BPM value, and you can set the BPM value to follow the tempo map during playback. To set the BPM value to follow the tempo map: LPress the [EFF2] key, and use the [j 0G] dial to select "L31:MonoBpmDL" or "L32:Pan BpmDL".

2. Select "BPM" for the editing parameter and rotate the [J 0G] dial clockwise.

If you furthermore rotate the dial clockwise after the value reaches "250" (which is the maximum value), the BPM value field shows "***M", where "**#" shows the tempo value at the current position while "M" shows "map".

3. After setting the BPM value to "**M", press the [E XIT/NO] key to quit the effect edit mode.

<Note> The operation above assumes that the appropriate tempo map is set in the SETUP mode. If you carry out the operation above with the default tempo map (tempo = 120), the BPM value is set to "120". If you do not want to reflect the tempo map value, set to a value with no "M". Short delay effect parameters (parameter type: SHORT DELAY) For effect type 33 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted. L.Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0-99 2.Delay Time Adjust the delay time. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms 3.Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0-99 4.Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0-10 5.Fikter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9-L1, OFF, H1-H9

• L149 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)
• H1-H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency) Doubling effect parameters (parameter type: DOUBLING) For effect type 34 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following three parameters can be adjusted. L.Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0-99 2.Lch Delay Adjust the delay time of the L channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10-99 ms, 100-200 ms 3.Rch Delay Adjust the delay time of the R channel. Range: 0.1-9.9 ms, 10--99ms, 100-200 ms 4.Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9-L1, OFF, H1-H9

• L149 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

3. Double Time Adjust the time difference of the doubling effect. Range: 0-99

4. Double Lvl Adjust the volume of the doubling effect. Range: 0-99

5. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9-L1, OFF, H1-H9

• L1-L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)
• H1-H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

• 4-12 is one octave. #/-24 is two octaves. 3.Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--450
• 450 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat. 4.Mode Select the processing method. Range: 1-3 Delay pitch effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY PITCH) For effect type 38 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted. 1.Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0-99 2.Pitch Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24-0-+24

• 4-12 is one octave. #24 is tWo octaves. 3.Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50

• 450 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat. 4.Delay Time Adjust the delay time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard. Range: 0--500 ms

5. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0-99

Scene Mem The VF160EX provides 100 scene memories (Scene numbers 00 to 99). You can store a set of desired parameter settings to each memory. Items to be stored include all parameters set by the channel parameter edit and effect edit modes, as well as all channel fader levels. Furthermore, you can give a desired scene name with up to 16 alphanu- meric or symbolic characters to each scene memory. In addition to 100 scene memories, the VF160EX also provides 10 temporary memories (Temporary numbers 00 to 09). Note that all the setting stored in a temporary memory disappears when turning off the power. Storing to a scene memory You can store the current settings to à scene memory j Select Scene Ha by the following procedure. TE RE ; ; nedl L Press the [SCENE-STORE] key. Flashing El Ÿ£ LÉÉS The display shows the screen for selecting the scene See CÜn-definedl number.

3. Enter the desired scene name using the J OG dial for

selecting a character and using the [REWINDJ/IF FWD] keys for moving the editing (flashing) point. You can specify a scene name with up to 16 alphanumeric or Symbolic characters and can see up to 14 characters on the display. The following characters can be entered: AtoZ, atoz, Oto9, [Un-de finedi]

which you want to store the current settings, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. . The display shows the screen for editing a title of the 4. After completing the scene name entry, press the [ENTER/ selected scene number. The name of the program which YES]key. you worked before entering the scene memory mode is The display will change to the Normal display of the duplicated to the name of the selected scene number, program whose scene name has been set. whose first character flashes, showing that it can be edited.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN c \ <Hint> Scene memories stored in the scene numbers (00 to 99) are preserved even if the power is turned off. However, a temporary memory stored in the Temporary numbers disappear and all the parameters return to the default "Un-defined" settings when the power is turned off, though they do not disappear when changing the pro- gram. If you want to store the temporary memory to à scene number (00 to 99), recall the temporary number before turning off the power and store the memory to the desired Scene number (00 to 99). Recalling a scene memory You can recall the settings stored in scene memories. L Press the [SCENE-RECALL] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the scene number. Select Scene Hô TES [Un-defined] H-define 592 [Un-defined]

2. Usethe [J 0G] dial to selectthe desired scene number to

be recalled, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. After "Scene Recalled" appears on the display, the selected ‘ne is recalled and the display changes to the Normal display. <Hints> +_ The contents recalled differ depending on the settings in the "Faderrecall" menu in the SETUP mode. See "Settings for fader recall" menu in the SETUP mode for the detailed information. +_Regardless of the current physical positions of channel and master faders, audio is output at the fader position location when they were stored. We suggest you turn the audio volume down when recalling a scene memory to prevent accidentally accessing high-volume sound. +_ When switching the display to the fader adjust, level adjust or fader view screen, the [FADER ADJ UST] key may flashes (when the fader recall setting is not set to "off". This indicates that the fader position in the current scene does not match the physical fader position. In such a case, you can turn off the key by adjusting the fader to the position in the current scene or by adjusting the level to the current physical position. See the following description for details about the fader adjustment and level adjustment.

Level adjust When recalling a scene memory, if the recalled fader level does not match the current physical fader posi- tion (the red indicator of the [FADER ADJ UST] key flashes), you can adjust the level to match the current fader position. L Press the [FADER ADJ UST]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The unit enters the Level adjust mode. The fader icons appear on the display, as well as flashing "Sure?". The recalled fader positions are shown as fader knob positions while the current fader positions are indicated by “>” and “<”. In the following example, all recalled fader positions are at the lowest positions. LFiashing Press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows "Completed!", immediately followed by the Normal display after each actual (internal) fader position is set to match the corresponding physical fader position. The flashing indicators of the FADER ADJUST turn off. With the example above, all actual faders are set to minimum. Fader adjust When recalling a scene memory, if the recalled fader level does not match the current physical fader posi- tion (the red indicator of the [FADER ADJ UST] key flashes), you can move the physical faders to match the current fader positions of the scene. The following description is assumed that "Fader recall setting" of the SETUP mode is set to "CH&MST".

1. Press the [FADER ADJ UST]key alone.

The unit enters the Fader adjust mode. The fader icons appear on the display, as well as flashing "Select CH!". The recalled fader positions are shown as fader knob positions while the current fader positions are indicated by “>” and “<” If you press the [FADER ADJ UST] key when the fader recall setting is set to "Off", the display shows "Fader Recall Off" and then returns to the Normal display. Selectthe channel to be adjusted by pressing the corresponding [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key, and move the corresponding physical fader. In the screen example below, the physical fader position of channel 1 matches the recalled fader position.

If two adjacent channels are fader-paired, pressing the ICH STATUS/CH SEL] key for the odd channel selects both channels and you can simultaneously control both chan- nels. The fader icon for the even channel as shown in a dotted line, indicating that you do not have to adjust it. U ) The fader icons below are examples of indicating differ- ent status. (The current physical fader position | is higher than the recalled position. ü ) fader position matches the recalled position. («The current physical fader position | is lower than the recalled position.

3. Repeatthe previous step for each channel.

4. After adjusting all the fader positions, press the [EXIT/NO]

key. The indicator of the [FADER ADJ UST] key turns off. ‘The currentphysical

<Note> The previous description for "Fader adjust" is à that "Fader recall setting" of the SETUP mode "CH&MST". However, the default of "Fader recall setting" is "Off". In this setting, the indicator of the [FADER ADJ UST] key will not flash when recalling a scene memory, because the fader positions are not recalled and the current fader positions remain effective. Therefore, if you want to make the recalled fader posi- tions of a scene memory effective, set the "Fader recall setting” properly according to your requirement. See "SETUP mode" on page 145 for details about the fader recall setting. <Hint> If the fader recall setting of the SETUP mode is set to "CH", the display shows the screen as below when the unit enters the fader adjust mode, indicating all the channel fader positions are recalled, while the master fader po- sition is not recalled. Moving the master fader in this mode directly affects the actual fader level.

Direct recall of a scene memory Besides recalling a scene memory by selecting the de- sired scene from the list as described above, you can recall a scene directly. Note> You can directly recall only the scene memories following to the current scene. For example, if the current scene number is 05, while scene memories are stored in scene numbers O1 through 10, you can directly recall scene numbers 06 through 10. Also note that scene number 00 cannot be recalled.

Press the [SCENE-RECALL] key while holding down the ISHIFT] key. Every time you press the [SCENE RECALL] key while holding down the [SHIFTIkey, the next scene is recalled. You cannot use the direct recall function When there is no scene that stores data other than scene number 00, or when the highest scene number is recalled. If you carry out the above operation, the display will show "No-additional Scene" and the operation is ignored. When a scene is directly recalled, the "Faderrecall setting" of the SETUP mode is also effective, as described in "Recalling a scene memory" above. Clearing a scene memory You can clear an unnecessary scene memory by using the following procedure. <Note> You cannot clear the memories in scene number 00 or current scene (whose scene number flashes in the screen) If you select scene number 00 and try to clear the memory, "Warning Can't Clear Current Scene" appears on the display and the operation is ignored. L Press the [SCENE RECALL]and [SCENE STORE] keys simultaneously. The display shows the screen for selecting a scene to be cleared. "#####' shows a user-defined scene name. In the next step, you can select any scene number except $00 Init Mix". Select Scene Ho | ré CUn-defined]

2. Selectthe desired scene to be cleared using the [J 0G]

dial, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The confirmation message for clearing the selected scene appears, in which "Sure?" flashes. To cancel the operation, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected scene memory is cleared and the scene name changes to "[Un-defined]", showing that no memory is stored.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN Scene Event Map By creating a scene event map, you can recall desired scene memories (mixer settings) at desired positions during playback. For example, you can recall scene memory 02 at OOH 01M 34$ O0F and scene memory 04 at OOH 02M 20S 20F, etc. In the following description, we assume that the time base is set to ABS. However, you may set the time base to Bar/Beat/CIk which allows you to specify the event position by Bar/Beat/CIk numbers. <Note> You must store data to scene memories used in a scene event map in advance. See "Scene memory" above about how to store the current settings to a scene memory. Creating an event memory An event memory can be created via two methods. Lonthefly

2. by specifying a desired time

You can create up to 99 event memories (01 to 99). Tips: In addition to the methods shown above, during the digital scrub operation, you can register the time after scrubbing by pressing the [HOLD/>Ikey, followed by [LOCATE]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. See "Chapter 4 Recorder Functions" for details about digital scrubbing. Creating an event memory on the fly L Atthe desired position while the VF160EX is stopped or during playback, press the [HOLD/>] key. The time when pressing the [HOLD/>] key is held.

3. Press the [LOCATE/EVT MEM]key while holding down the

ISHIFT] key. "Entry EVT#" (where ** shows the event memory number) appears for a short time, while the time held in step 1 is entered in the event memory.

4. To create other event memories, repeat step 1 through 3

above. <Note> An event memory created by the above procedure only contains event time data. To set the desired scene num- ber to be recalled to each event memory, see "Creating the scene event map" described later. <Hint> Event memory numbers are assigned in ascending or- der of ABS time, regardless of order in which event memories are created. For example, if you first create an event memory 1 (EVTO1) with data "05m 00$" and then create an event memory with data "O3m 305", the event memory 1 data is replaced with "03m 305" auto- matically, while the previous data ("05m 00s") is as- signed to event memory 2.

<Viewing the event memories > The event memories created in real-time by the procedure described above can be viewed by the operation below. 1 While the VF160EX is stopped, press the [SCENE STORE/MAP]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The screen shows the event memory list as below, in which you can view and check the event memories created in real-time. 9 Géhornageee Non 64 Gähi2n34568 _Hon ASE | cr BE ÉnEE 2H Horn Tips: The event memory number that is nearest to the current position flashes in the screen above. By selecting the desired event number using the 0G]dial and pressing the [LOCATE] key, you can locate the event memory position. reating an event memory by specifying the desired time <Notes> The following procedure is assumed that no event memory has been created, + _ Event memory “00” cannot be edited. 1 WhiletheVF160EX is stopped, press the [SCENE STORE/ MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The display shows the screen for selecting event memory numbers. When no event memory is created, the screen Shows as below. Select "01 New Event" using the [J OG]dial, and press the IENTER/YES]key. Rotate the [J 0G]dial to highlight "01 New Event". By pressing the [ENTER/YES]key, the event edit screen appears, where "Non flashes in the Scene number field.

Event Ho.Select GAME SEE Flashing étangs Abe + Le0 J0G <RWD FFUD+ Hit ENTER or EXIT While "Non" is flashing, you can selects the scene number from those currently stored by rotating the J 0G]dial. The corresponding scene names are also shown below. If no scene memory except the initial setting "500 Init Mix" is stored, selecting any scene number (01 to 99) except 00 Shows "Un-defined" on the scr In the description here, we skip selecting a scene number C'Non" continues to flash) and go to the next step for time editing. You may, of course, select a scene number after editing the event time. Use the [F FWD] key to select the flashing (editing) field in the time display. Each time you press the [F FWD] key, the flashing (editing) field moves from h ->m->s->f-> sf, while each press of the [REW] key moves the flashing field in reverse order. Rotate the [J 0G] dial to enter the desired value for the editing field. Repeat step 3 and 4 to enter the desired values to all fields. Press the [ENTER/YES] key after editing the time. The event memory with the edited time is created, and the display returns to the Normal Display. To create other event memories, repeat step 1 through 5. Creating the scene event map After preparing the event memory list, you can create the scene event map. Note that all necessary scene memories must be stored in advance when carrying out the following.

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the scene number for the selected event memory ("Non flashes).

3. Selectthe desired scene number by using the [J OG] dial,

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The selected scene number is assigned to the event memory. In the example shown below, a scene number igned to each event memory. Deleting an event memory You can delete unnecessary event memories. Note> You cannot delete event memory 00. L WhiletheVF160EX is stopped, press the [SCENE STORE/ MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. The screen shows the event memory list.

2. Selectthe desired event memory using the [J 0G] dial,

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the scene number for the selected event memory.

3. While the scene numberis flashing, rotate the [] OG]dial

counterclockwise. "EVT DEL" (Event Delete) flashes in the scene number field, showing that the event memory selected above is ready to be deleted. SÉbE mi sa fab f

4. While "EVT DEL" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The confirmation message for deleting the selected event memory, in which "Sure?" flashes.

5. Press the [ENTER/YES] key

To cancel the operation, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The selected event memory is deleted and the screen shows the event memory list.

FOSteX VFISOS< EN Scene sequence mode on/off selection You can turn on or off the scene sequence mode for selecting whether or not executing the scene sequence program using the scene event map. L While theVF160EX is stopped, press the [A RTN A PLAY/ SCENE SEQ] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. After "SCENE SEQ: ON" is briefly shown on the screen, the Normal display appears. Each time you press the [A RTN À PLAY/SCENE SE Q] key while holding down the [SHIFT]key, ON and OFF alternates. When the scene sequence mode is set to ON, the scene number indicator on the Normal display is highlighted (When OFF, it is not highlighted). LEE | Executing the scene sequence When the scene sequence mode is set to ON, the scenes will be recalled according to the scene event map dur- ing playback. <Notes> ° When executing the scene sequence, the fader positions are recalled according to the fader recall mode in the SETUP mode (the default is "Off"). For example, if you set the fader recall mode to "CH & MST”, both the channel and master faders are automatically recalled every time the current scene changes. On the contrary, if you set the fader recall mode to "Off" (the default mode), fader positions are not recalled so you can manually control fader positions as you like. We suggest you to make sure to set the fader recall mode suitably for your work before executing the scene sequence. See page 145 for details about the fader recall mode setting. + When you do not use the scene sequence function, set the scene sequence mode to OFF.

• Effect presets of the internal effect processor are classified into three types; ambience/delay type (No.1 through 28), modulation/pitch type (No.29 through 36) and pitch type (No.37 and 38). Note that the scene sequence function does not recall an effect preset whose type is different from the cur rent one. This is to avoid momentary audio muting, and is not a malfunction. The other mix parameters of the scene can be recalled even if it includes an effect preset whose type is different from the current one.

Screen appearances during playback> The following show the screen appearances during play- back with the scene event map in which scene number 02 (with title "XXX") is recalled at O1m 30s and scene number 05 (with title "YYY") is recalled at 05m O0s. #6891 nit MixE The unit starts playback with scene number 00 (Init Mix). The unit recalls scene number 2 (XXX) at Om 30s and continues playback. The unit recalls scene number 5 (YYY) at 05m 00s and continues playback. <Hint> The unit continues playback with the scene number recalled by the last event memory. Therefore, if you want to recall scene number 00 again after recalling scene number 05, you have to create the last event memory that recalls scene number 00 at the desired time.

Chapter 4 Recorder Functions

This chapter describes the cueing/digital scrubbing function, vari pitch control, auto functions, program management and track editing (such as copy/paste, move/paste, erase, track exchange, etc.). Cueing/Digital Scrubbing This section describes the cueing feature for cueing sound during the F FWD or REWIND process. Cueing with the [F FWDJIRE WIND] key The user can cue at 3x speed by pressing the [F FWDJ/ ÎRE WIND] key while the recorder is playing. L Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key.

2. Press the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during playback.

Either “FWD >” or “<RWD” will appear on the LCD. Then 3x speed cuing starts in the direction chosen. RUD Sad: init MixE

3. Press the [PLAY] key to return to the original play speed

(1x speed). Shuttle Cueing Shuttle cueing at a cue speed between 1-64x is possible by turning the [ 0G] dial while the [SHIFT] key is depressed when the recorder is playing. The speed varies according to the degree the dial is turned. L Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

2. Turn the [J OG/SHUTTLE] dial to the left/right while the

ISHIFT] key is depressed. *_ Turn the [j 0G] dial to the right to shuttle cue in the FORWARD direction. Turn the [j 0G] dial to the left to shuttle cue in the REWIND direction. *_ The cueing speed varies from 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16%, 32x and 64x according to the degree (angle) in which the D 0G]dial is turned. The current cueing speed appears on the LCD. SggsInit MixE *_ Shuttle cueing continues as long as the [SHIFT] key is depressed, even when the [J 06] dial isn’t used.

3. Lift finger from [SHIFT] key to return to the original play

<Remember!> Once the data is rewound to the beginning of a program (ABS 0), playback starts from the beginning of the program, regardless of pressing the [SHIFT] key. When reaching the end of a program (ABS:23H 59M 595), the program stops and the [PLAY] key flashes. Digital scrubbing with the [SCRUB]key To enter the Digital Scrub Mode, press the [SCRUB]key while the recorder is in the STOP state to cue at 0-1x speed without any change in musical key. Digital scrub is possible for each track. The level envelope (volume wave form) of that track appears. This feature is effective when it is necessary to conduct a pinpoint search of the beginning of a song or a point (location) between songs. L Press the [SCRUB] key while the recorder is in the STOP state. The scrub mode is activated and the following display appears. Zooms <@81 IN Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the track to scrub. The level envelope of the selected track appears. The first time you enter the scrub mode after turning on the power, the magnification is set to x 1.

(Goomsx8i) + IN Currentlocation Magnification Tips: How to change the zoom magnification You can select the zoom magnification by using the [F FWD] and[REWIND]keys. Each press of the [F FWD]key increases the magnification from x 01-> x02-> x04-> x08-> x 16. Each press of the [REWIND] key decreases the magnifica- tion. The magnification setting is global for all tracks, and is shown at the bottom of the display. Also, when the mag- nification is not set to x 01, you can temporarily change it to x 01 while holding down the [SHIFTI key. Note that the magnification is resets to x 01 when turn- ing off the power.

3. Turn the [} 0G] dial left and right to hear the playback

sound of only the track selected. The center line indicates the current location. Scrub takes place in the FORWARD or REWIND direction from this point. Either “<Scrub” or “Scrub>” appears when turning the J 0G]dial, which moves the cursor forward or reverse. The time value (or BAR/BEAT) also appears in realtime while scrubbing,.

4. Press the [STOP] key to return to the normal display.

The time display when ending the scrub process appears. iable Pitch Control This section describes the Variable Pitch Control feature to play or record programs at variable recorder speeds. The VF160EX can change the speed in 0.1% units within a +/-6.0% range. Note that the key changes when changing the variable pitch speed. Variable Pitch Control ON/OFF sons" "sn

ss './/2) ne = Ci (1h } (When the vari pitch En _rction is acte, the (M } CN ) key is illuminated.

• Press the [VARI PITCH] key. The key lights up GREEN. This means the feature is ON.

• Press the [VARI PITCH]key once again. The key lights OFF. This means that the feature is OFF. <Precaution> The variable pitch control can be turned ON/OFF when the recorder is in the STOP/PLAY modes. Variable pitch control is not available when the recorder is recording, even though the key is pressed. Setting the Speed Note that the speed can be set only in the recorder STOP or PLAY mode. It cannot be changed when the recorder is recording. By playing back a program with the variable pitch control ON it is possible to adjust the speech while monitoring the changes. 1 Putthe recorder in the STOP or PLAY mode. Press the IVARI PITCH/P.EDIT] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed. The current setting appears on the LCD and “%” flashes. This means that the recorder is ready to edit with the variable pitch control feature.

ÉbLs #GO8 1 [Een D ten Flashing Variable pitch control ON/OFF alternates between ON and OFF each time the [VARIPITCH]key is pressed in this state. “EL” or“ DEF” lights up. Fitch EG CAE Soi: #a@al [en er en mob M brel

2. Turn the [J 0G] dial to setthe setting.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the normal display.

<Precaution> + You can turn ON the variable pitch function by pressing the [VARI PITCH] key, even when the current pitch data is 0.0% (state where there is no change in speed). However, this does not mean that there is any change in speed in this state. It simply means that the variable pitch function is ON. The variable pitch is automatically turned OFF in the following cases:

1. When the power is turned ON again. (the pitch

data is reset to 0.0% at this time)

2. When the “Slave Mode On/Off Setting” of the

SETUP mode is turned “On”. (previously set pitch data are saved)

3. When “EH” and “ ” lights up on the

display while the [Digital Input Setting] in the SETUP mode is set to “S/P DIF” or “adat”.

EN VISO= FOSteX Auto Functi The VF16O0EX is equipped with 3 Auto Functions. One is the “Auto Play”, which automatically starts playing a track after locating it. Another is the “Auto Return”, which locates a predetermined time during playback. The third, “Auto Repeat”, combines the former two features to repeat playing a certain segment. Use the [A RTN/A PLAY] key to start the Auto Function. Every time the key is pressed the function switches through “Auto Play” -> “Auto Return” -> “Auto Repeat” -> “OFF”. The Normal Display will show an icon of each functional status. Auto Play L Press the [A RTN/A PLAY] key during the Normal Display, to display the Auto Play icon (see figure below) on the LCD. Pas HAE Sa 1: #46 k + +n+

2. Follow the above location instructions to locate a chosen

point. Playback automatically starts from the time located. Auto Return The Auto Return function automatically locates à START point when the track is played to the END point. To execute the Auto Return function, you must set the START point and END point time. Start Point

En LÉLLLLELELELE CEE EEE EEE J Locating Stop Set (Store) START/E ND Point L Press the [STORE] key at the time to set. This key can be pressed during then play or stop mode.

. Press the [AUTO RTN-START] key or [AUTO RTN-END] key. The time is set at the respective points, and then the LCD returns to the Normal Display. The VF160EX stops when a time is stored during playback. <Precaution> Always set the START point time before the END point time. The Auto Return functions will not operate properly unless the start and end times are set correctiy.

3. Press the [A RTN/A PLAY] key in the Normal Display to

display the Auto Return icon on the LCD. (see figure below)

4, Play the VF160EX from the point immediately before the END point time. Auto Return then takes effect. Auto Repeat Auto Repeat is a combination of Auto Play and Auto Return. When play reaches the END point, the function automatically locates the START point. By automatically starting to play after locating the START point, it becomes possible to repeatedly playback a certain segment. Start Point

1. Setthe START point time and END point time, the same

asthe “Auto Return” function.

2. Press the [A RTN/A PLAY] key in the Normal Display to

display the Auto Repeat icon on the LCD. (as shown in figure below)

3. Start playing the VF160EX from the point immediately

before the END point time set. Auto Repeat will take effect.

FOX VFISOS< With the VF160EX, the music is managed according to programs numbered 01-99 (99 programs). These programs are independent of each other and can be recorded or played separately. This section describes the instructions of how to operate the program. Creating a New Program One program (P0O1) is automatically created on the VF160EX when formatting the hard disk. Follow the instructions below to create a New Program. Note that the VF160EX must be in the STOP mode. <Precaution> The contents as the program currently started is copied as the default setting of a newly created program. To keep the same default settings as previously created programs, first start up the previous program and then create a new program. L Press the [PGM SEL] key in the STOP state. The current program number and “Select PGM!” appears, then “Sure?” flashes on the LCD.

POI CHE SelectPGNM! Eure k LD

2. Turn the [J 0G] dial clockwise to find “New PGM? ”,then

press the [ENTER/YES] key. A new program is created, then automatically proceeds to the “Title Edit” menu of the SETUP mode. This allows the user to input (edit) the title name of the newly created program. Press the [EXIT/NO] key twice to create a program with a working title, without editing the title. When the [EXIT/NO] key is pressed, the system returns to the Normal Display. To edit the working title, proceed as follows.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

The “TentativeTitle” (0002, etc.) that was automatically ssigned when creating a new program appears on the LCD. The left end of the title is highlighted and flashes. This means that the tentative (working) title of the newly created program can be edited. Edit the title in the following manner. Note that the “Title Edit” function described later can also edit or reedit the title of a new program already assigned a title or one that was edited. <How to add a title!> + Turn the [ 0G] dial at the cursor (flashing point). The following alphanumerics can be selected. + Shift through the cursor (flashing point) by pressing the [HOLD/>] key, [REWIND] key or [F FWD] key. *_ Rotate the J 06] dial while holding down the [SHIFT] key and the recorder will jump to the letters/symbols listed below (small square position).

4. Press the [ENTER/YES] key after assigning a title.

The program is set with the title assigned.

5. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key).

The user escapes from the SETUP mode and the Normal Display of the newly created program appears on the LCD. <Notes> + Note that when creating a new program, the next sequential number of the program currently set on the disk is set. If there is only one program, then program number 2 (PO2) is created. If there are five programs, then program number P06 is assigned. The program name started when creating a new program is directly copied for the scene name (S01: #0002, etc.) appearing below the program number. Available disk space is slightly reduced by creating a new program. The user cannot create a new program when there is not enough disk space available to save that program.

EN VISO= FOSteX Selecting a Program If there are several programs set on the disk, there may be a need to select a target program. The following instructions are based on the VF160EX in the STOP status in the Normal Display. 1.Press the [PGM SEL] key in the STOP state. The current program number and “Select PGM!” appears, then the “Sure?” message starts flashing on the LCD.

2. Turn the [J 0G] dial display to select the target program

number (flashing). “New PGM?” appears when turning the J 0G]dial clockwise. Use this to create a new program, according to the instructions as described above.

3. Select the target program number (flashing), then press

the [ENTER/YES] key. The Normal Display of the selected program appears. Erasing a Program The user can erase unnecessary programs. Note that there must be sufficient storage space (disk space available to store new/more data) on the hard disk to record or edit existing programs. By erasing an unnecessary program from the disk, the user can make more disk space and thus, ensure smooth operations of other functions. <Precaution> + The program started prior to executing the ERASE function is the program that is going to be erased. Therefore, the user must start the program to erase according to the “Selecting a Program” instructions, described above. If a program is erased when there is only one program on the disk, then only the data saved for that program is erased. Note that an empty program 1 (PO1) will remain on the disk even in such case. Let's take the following case as an example. As shown in the figure below, there are five programs from POI to POS, Note that the program numbers always remain in sequential order. Therefore, when program number PO3 is erased, there will only be à total of 4 programs. This means though the data on PO3 is erased, and the numbers are sequentially corrected (no number is skipped). Note that only the contents of PO3 are erased and the numbers are merely reassigned in sequential order according to the number of programs available. Simply put, PO4 becomes P03 and P05 becomes P04, when PO3 is erased, as in this case. POL Po2 P03 Po4 P05 Delete PO1 P02 P03 | | PO04 | + Remember that it is not possible to UNDO/REDO (unerase or re-erase) the ERASE feature once a program is erased. 1.Press the [SETUP] key in the STOP state. The system goes to the SETUP mode and proceeds to the SETUP menu selection display.

2. Turn the [} 0G] dial to select the “Delete” menu, then

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The current program number appears and “Sure?” flashes (*#*#% Title). To cancel the ERASE procedure, press the [EXIT/NO] key while “Sure?” is flashing. = Select Menu __ k+-

The Normal Display of the next program following the program erased appears. Editing a ProgramTitle Note that the program title can be assigned when “Creating a New Program” as described in the previous section. However, the user must follow the instructions below to edit a title (or Tentative Title) that has already been assigned. <Precaution> Note that only the title of the program that i can be edited. The user cannot choose a program from the SETUP mode. Therefore, the user must first start the program to edit, before going to the SETUP mode. started up L Press the [SETUP] key in the STOP state. The system goes to the SETUP mode and proceeds to the display to select a SETUP menu.

2. Turn the [j 0G] dial to selectthe “Title Edit” menu, then

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The title (name) of the current program started appears. The left end of the title is highlighted and flashes. (the flashing cursor indicates that it is editable) Title Edit PGM FEIT #4 ES EE SE LE 1 ÜF-DOUH JOG : FFUDE + +2 REU Hit YVES or HO Ken

3. Press the [RE WIND] key or [F FWD] key to move the

cursor to the point to edit. Then turn the [} 0G] dial to choose the alphanumeric/symbol to input. The title can contain up to 16 characters form the following alphanumerics and symbols. The VF160EX features a 3.5 inch E-IDE hard disk as a storage media. This allows speedy voice editing in a nonlinear

4. Press the [ENTER/YES] key after inputting the title.

The title input is set and the LCD returns to the Normal Display. and nondestructive manner in track units. There are four track editing options as described below. Copy & Paste Aspecific range of data on a voluntary track can be copied and then pasted to the same track or another track. Note that the Copy & Paste feature is only possible with the current program started. A specific range of data of a voluntary track can be moved and pasted to the same track or another track. Note that the Move & Paste feature is only possible with the current program started. A specific range of data on a voluntary track or on all real tracks are erased. Note that the Erase feature is only possible with the current program started. Track Exchange Tracks are interchangeable with each other. Mono tracks or several (2 track or 8 track unit) tracks are exchangeable, to freely exchange between the 24 real tracks and additional tracks. Note that the Track Exchange feature is only possible with the current program started. <Precautions> + DO NOT change the program during the editing process until the entire editing process is completed, since the editing process only effects the program currently selected. °_ Note that the editing process other than Track Exchange is only an option for real tracks (Trk 1-16). To edit data on additional tracks (Trk 17-24), exchange it to a real track to execute the editing process. Copy & Paste Copy & Paste refers to the procedure to temporarily copy to a clipboard (Copy/Clip) a specific range of data on à voluntary track. That copied data can then be pasted to a specific paste point on a voluntary track. Since, the data copied remains in the clipboard even after pasting the data, that same copied data can be pasted numerous times.

PASTE PASTE = DESTINATION TRACK copy SOURCE TRACK Copy & Paste and Move & Paste Move & Paste Move & Paste resembles the Copy & Paste feature and refers to the procedure to temporarily move to a clipboard (Move/Clip) a sp range of data on a voluntary track. The difference between the Move & Paste and Copy & Paste feature is that with Move & Paste the original data moved can only be pasted ONCE. At the point the move dat pasted the data in the clipboard and original data is longer available to paste again.

EN VISO= FOSteX Copy & Paste and Move & Paste This section describes the Copy & Paste (or Move & Paste) details. <Precaution> *_ The data copied (or moved) on the clipboard is *_ Note that the data copied in the clipboard is replaced replaced with new data every time data is copied (or moved). when pasting over the original data copied. Executing Copy (or Move) and CLIP

Set the point to start COPY (or MOVE) and the point to startthe PASTE feature. Set the COPY (or MOVE) starting point to the [CLIPBOARD IN] key, the ending point to the [CLIPBOARD OUT] key, and the PASTE starting point to the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key. For more details on how to set (store) to the memory key refer to page 34. Press the [EDIT] key to proceed to the “Copy Clip: “Move Clip? ”) message. " (or To execute the Copy & Paste feature select“Copy Clip?”. Flashing —| E Et FlshngMous Clir? Select Track!

Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the track to COPY (or MOVE). Both mono tracks and multiple tracks (including ALL tracks) can be selected. During the Copy & Paste (or! Move &Paste) to tracks that are odd and even number trac next to each other. In any other case, when cop. moving) multiple tracks, the data is pasted to the original copy site (or move) of the same track. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. Press the [ENTER/YES] key to complete the data copy (or move) process. “Completed!” appears on the display then the “Copy Paste” (or “Move Paste”) message flashes. This means that the sound data has been copied (or moved) to the clipboard, and that the system is ready to proceed to the following paste process. The recorder is ready to paste if there is no problem with the COPY/CLIP (or MOVE/CLIP) process. At this stage, it is possible to check the sound data in which COPY/CLIP (or MOVE/CLIP) was executed. To check the data on the clipboard, refer to the instructions described in “Checking Data in the Clipboard”.

<Precaution> +_IFCOPY (or MOVE) is executed without selecting a track to COPY (or MOVE), then “SelectTrack!” will appear on the LCD with a flashing “Copy Clip!” (or “Move Clip!”) message. In this repeat the procedure by using the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to choose the track to COPY (or MOVE). Ifthe CLIPBOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point is stored in the reverse time relationship when attempting to COPY (or MOVE), then a “Void In Point!” or “Void Out Point!” warning appears on the display and prevents any further process. In such case, reset the proper time relationship of the CLIPBOARD IN/ OUT points prior to COPY (or MOVE). <Check the Clipboard Data> Prior to pasting any sound data, follow the instructions below to check for the presence of any sound data copied (or moved) on the clipboard. + Press the [PLAY] key while the [STOP]ke depressed. The sound data copied or moved on the clipboard appears (if the data is copied “Copy Clip Play!” appears, and if it is moved data then “Move Clip Play!” appears), and that data is played (clipboard play). To monitor the sound played, make the adjustments with the channel fader corresponding to the track copied (or moved). The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key that was copied (or moved) flashes during playback. The recorder automatically stop when clipboard play is over. +_ Press the [EDIT] key after checking the data. When the earlier mentioned COPY (or MOVE) is completed, the LCD will then return to the same display (flashing “Copy Paste” or “Move Paste”). Pasting Data

5. Press the [ENTER/YES] key when “Copy Paste” (or

“Move Paste”) is flashing. The menu to select the paste repeat frequency appears (Repeat = 01”), then “O1” and “Sure?” flashes. (Note that “1” refers to paste once.) The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the track copied (or moved) flashes. Cars Paste Fereat=dl £ure? LE TE] Move Paste Fereat=61 Sure? ed M bord ke buse

6. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the paste

destination track. + _ There is no need to select a track when pasting on the same track. + _ The mono track is the only track in which the paste destination can be changed. The other condition in which the paste destination can be changed is when the data from two tracks (odd and even) next to each other (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, etc.) are copied (or moved) on the clipboard. The paste destination track can be changed by pressing the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key in this case.

FOX VFISOS< + Note that it is not possible to paste to the same track that was copied (or moved) when copying (or moving) multiple tracks (1-3, 5-8, etc.), although it was possible in the cases described earlier. In this case, the track will not be changed even if the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key is pressed.

7. Tum the [J OG]dial to choose the paste repeat frequency.

The desired number can be input in the “01” area of the “Repeat =01” that is currently flashing. The maximum repeat frequency that can be input is 99 but this repeat frequency is automatically limited according to how much space is available on the disk. Simply put, a frequency of 99 repeat times can be input if there is enough disk space. If there isn't, then only the maximum allowable repeat frequency (size) for the remaining disk space can be input. Itis not possible to go above this number even if the [J 0G] dial is turned. UNDO/REDO Paste Copy & Paste or Move & Paste can be undone and redone with the UNDO/REDO feature. +_ The data pasted can be undone (unpasted) by pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after Copy & Paste (or Move & Paste). The data will return to the pre-paste status when undone (unpasted). +_ Data pasted but undone (unpasted) can be redone {re-pasted) by pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key immediately after undoing the paste process. The data will return to the post-paste status when re-done (re-pasted). Note the following when executing the UNDO/REDO feature. <Caution> The UNDO/REDO feature is valid only when the recorder is in the STOP state. UNDO/REDO is no longer possible if

8. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. the following procedures take place after Copy & Paste

“Copy Paste” (or “Move Paste”) flashes on the display. (or Move & Paste). “PleaseWaït!” flashes while the data is being pasted. 1. When data is newly recorded “C ompleted!" lights up when the data has been successfully 2. When data is newly edited. pasted. 3. When the AUTO PUNCH mode is ON and PLAY (or RECORD) mode is effected, and the point has already

2. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key). | passed the AUTO PUNCH IN point.

The system exits from the edit mode and returns to the “ original time base display. 4. When the power is turned OFF.

5. When program selection takes place.

<Caution> Note that Copy & Paste (or Move & Paste) is not possible unless there is enough disk space to “UNDO/REDO”, as explained in the next and the ion. When attempting to paste to a disk that does fficient time appears according to the currently selected time base. ot have enough di space, “OverTime!” appear on the display In such case, either shorten the COPY DATA (or MOVE DATA) by the time it is in the excess, or erase unnecessary data or programs from the erase to secure enough disk space. Then repeat the paste procedure. Refer to the “Erasing a Program” on page 71 for instructions on how to erase a program, in terms of the “ERASE” instructions to erase unnecessary data. <Please note > For regular copy & paste (or move & paste) as shown in Figure 1, the CLIPBOARD IN point of the data which was copy clipped (or move clipped) onto the clipboard, is aligned with the AUTO PUNCH IN point and pasted. Figure 1> Due to this, as shown in Figure 2, in the case whereby data registered in the CLIPBOARD is the actual sound point and head of the measure is behind this, then even though you attempted to paste this head of the measure in alignment with this previously head, it will be pasted off alignment by this procedure due to the CLIPBOARD IN = ALIGN SEL function.

Figure 2> To align the head of the measure for pasting together with sound data in front of the measure, the “ALIGN SEL” function of VF160EX can be utilized. To use this function, the head of the measure data in the clip data must be registered in the [ALIGN SEL] key as shown in Figure 3. EU Mi

nes Figure 3> CLIPBOARD IN data, as a result of copy clip (or move clip), will be directly registered in the [ALIGN SEL]key. Next, recall the [ALIGN SEL] key data (press the [ALIGN SEL]key) and, after correcting this data to head point of the measure, press the [STORE] key and then the [ALIGN SEL] key. After this, by executing copy & paste (or move & paste), the aligned heads of the measures together with data in front of the measures, can be pasted. <Note > The range in correction of the ALIGN SEL data must be strictly limited between CLIPBOARD IN-OUT.

EN VISO= FOSteX The VF160EX provides the following “ERASE” options. Please read the instructions in its entirety prior to actual operations, to prevent any erroneous understanding of the description. First, start the desired program if there are several programs set. DO NOT change a program in the middle of the erase procedure. Erasing a selected section between ABS -REC END. A selected section between ABS 0 (beginning of disk) and REC END (REC end point) is erased of the program currently started up. Both mono tracks and multiple tracks (including all real tracks) can be erased if assuming that they are real tracks. To erase data, it needs to first be on a real track. When erasing a selected section between ABS 0 - REC END, END of recording point remains unchanged as shown in the figure below. Only the section erased of data (meaning there will be no sound on that section) will be erased. Once the data is erased there will be more disk space remaining on the disk (more storage space to save new data). AUTO PUNCH pont AUTO PUNCH OUT point art Sn Erase! Anyreai tac Erasing from a voluntarily specified point to REC END. Al data from a voluntarily specified point (other than ABS

0) to REC END is erased from the currently started program.

Both mono tracks and multiple tracks can be erased, as in the case described to the left. When erasing all tracks to REC END, the REC END point moves forward. However, the REC END point may not move forward (Refer to <Precautions> on this page for more details) even when erasing data on multiple tracks that are not mono tracks or all tracks. Note that the disk space remaining increases as in the case to the left, after data is erased from a section. AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point N / Any real track n (REC END) i | Erase Anyrealtack D] Silence ABS 0 (REC END) <recautions Upon Erasing Data> As in the case below, if data is recorded on real tracks 1 to 7, and data is erased from tracks 1 and 2, then the REC END, which the VF160EX recognizes, remains the same before and after erasing data. AUTO PUNCH OUT point (REC END)

Any realtrack «a8s 0) [ES (REC END) Any real track Silence (REC END) {ABS 0) On the other hand, if data is erased from tracks 3 to 7 as shown in the figure below, the REC END point after erasing data will be positioned at the REC END point of tracks 1 and 2. In other words, the REC END point prior to erasing data moves, after the data is erased. AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point Any real track [ES Silence Sience Silence Silence Silence | (RECEND) Any real track {ABS 0) (REC END) Erasing Data L Setthe starting point and ending point of the section to erase. Set the starting point to erase to the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key, and the ending point to erase to the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key. For more details on setting data to the memory key refer to page 34.

2. Press the [EDIT] key in the STOP state. Then select

3. Use the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key to select the track to

erase. Mono tracks or multiple tracks (including all real tracks) can be selected to ERASE. The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the track selected flashes.

“Sure?” flashes. rase

5. Press the [ENTER/YES] key once again.

The erase process will takes place. “Wait Erasing!” flashes on the display while data is being erased. “Completed!” lights up on the display when the data is successfully erased.

6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key).

The LCD returns to the Normal Display prior to the editing mode. r ù <Remember!> To erase all data between ABS 0 and REC END), it is recommended that the time after REC END is set as the ERASE end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT point) to ensure that all the data is completely erased. In such case, move the current location of the recorder to the REC END point prior to setting the AUTO PUNCH OUT point and then press the [PLAY] key from that REC END point to move the REC END point slightly forward. Then press STOP. By setting that STOP point (time) to the [AUTO PUNCH OUTIkey, it becomes possible to thoroughly erase all data from that ion. The hard disk does not a any point after the REC END point, even when PLAY is started. When there is no data on that section, only the time will be counted. UNDO/REDO Erase The erase procedure can be undone and redone with the UNDO/REDO feature. *_ Data eased can be undone (unerased) by pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after ERASE. The data will return to the pre-erase status. *_ The data erased but undone (unerased) can be redone (re-erased) by pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key immediately after undoing the erase process. The data will return to the post-erase status. Note the following when executing the UNDO/REDO feature. <Precautions> The UNDO/REDO feature is valid only when the recorder is in the STOP state. UNDO/REDO is no longer possible if the following procedures take place after ERASE,

1. When data is newly recorded.

2. When data is newly edited.

. When the AUTO PUNCH mode is ON and PLAY (or RECORD) mode is effected, and the point has already passed the AUTO PUNCH IN point. When the power is turned OFF. When program selection takes place. GES Track Exchange “Track Exchange” allows the tracks currently on the program to be interchanged (all real tracks and additional tracks) on mono track or multiple track (2 tracks or 8 tracks each) units. This function makes it possible to exchange real tracks. A real track can be emptied by moving a real track to a blank additional track. This means that real track can be recorded with other data. All-in-all, track exchange allows effective utilization of the tracks. As already described in the “Erase” section, the “Track Exchange” feature is necessary to check the REC END point of an additional track. One track exchange Track 9 Track 17 Track10 |! Track 18 Teck |! Track 19 Track12 |: Track 20 Te |: Track 21 Tack14 |: Track 22 Track15 |: Track 23 Track 16 ' Track 24

Executing Track Exchange L Press the [EDIT] key while the recorder is in the STOP state, and show “Track Exchange? ” on the display. AES Hi Track Exchanse? LEE |

2. Next press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The track exchange selection display appears. The current display indicates that track 1-8 and track 9- 16 can be exchanged in 8 track units. To select another combination, go to the next step, respectively. ERELE

[F FWD]key to make "09-16" flashing. "01-08<=>01-08"), you cannot carry out a track exchange. "SelectErr" appears on the display and the display re- turns to the previous one.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

eh D burrd The tracks are instantly exchanged. FlaShing “Complete!” appears on the display when the tracks are successfully exchanged. Then the LCD returns to the

The tracks are instantly exchanged. “Completed!” appears on the display when the tracks are successfully exchanged. Then the LCD returns to the original time base display. *Exchange in mono or 2-track units

1. Tum the [J 0G] dial while “1-8” is flashing.

You can select among mono tracks (1 through 24) and stereo 2 tracks (1&2, 3&4, … 23&24), as well as 8 tracks. The right column shows the same unit, according to the selection on the left column as shown in the figure below. Therefore, you should select track(s) in the left column first and then select track(s) in the right column. LES | Flashing

2. Press the [HOLD/>] or [F FWD] key to make the right

column flash, and select the desired track(s) using the D OG]dial. (Aote> The numbers on the right and left of mono tracks mean the same thing, therefore, the numbers can be reversed and still mean the same thing. In other words, “04<=>01” and “O1<=>04” mean the same thing. This representation means that tracks 1 and 4 will be exchanged, regardless of which number comes first.

Chapter 5 Features Application

Applications of DIRECT RECORD This section describes applications of the DIRECT RECORD feature. DIRECT RECORD while listening to the input signal DIRECT RECORD basically takes place with the play [TRACK] started for all the channel faders. However, it is also possible to start [INPUT] signals A to H. Here we will DIRECT RECORD to tracks 1 to 16, while monitoring the counter and listening to a rhythm machine (in this case, a drum machine) from input H. [Recording source ] [Guidance source ]

Connecting the sound source 4. Press the [RECORD] key and then setthe READY track to input monitor (RED: Flashing). By using the input monitor, it is possible to monitor the L Connectthe OUT ofthe drum machine to [INPUT] H.

2. Connectthe sound sources to record to [INPUT] A to F. sound sources of ch1-ch6 and the INPUT H signals, at the

same time. Set the PAN as desired so it is easy to monitor Setting the input signal to INPUT H the sound. L Press the [INPUT SEL] key (ORANGE: Flashing). 5. Adjust the [TRIM] of each channel while outputting the

2. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch16 so itflashes sound source.

ORANGE (ch16-> INPUT). Set the input level of each sound source, then proceed to the next REC process.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display.

4. Setthe ch16 fader and master fader to "0". Record

5. Startthe drum machine and then adjustthe [TRIM] of 8/ 1. To start recording, press the [PLAY] key while the

16H. [RECORD] key is depressed. The input signals of [INPUT]H are output from the L/R Sounds are DIRECTLY RECORDED to tracks 1-6 stereo OUT. Use the [MON OUT] knob or [PHONES] knob to according to the guidance sounds of input H. increase the volume to an appropriate level. <Caution> Setting the input signals to INPUT A to F *_lfthe ch16 fader is set to “INPUT”,then track 16 cannot enter READY status which means recording will

1. Press the [DIRECT-REC TRK] key, then choose a track not be possible. If, for example, all faders of ch9-ch16

to record with the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key. (RED: are set to “INPUT”, then recording is no longer possible Flashing) on tracks 9-16. Note that this does not affect any Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch1-ch 6 so tracks signal already recorded on tracks 9-16. 1-6 will be READY. + The fader of ch16 merely adjusts the level of the H | LINPUT] signal sent to stereo OUT. Therefore, it does

2. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display. not adjust the level of the signals recorded.

3. Setch1-ch6 faders to "0".

Generally, “mixdown” means the process for mixing audio materials (instruments, vocals, etc.) recorded on a multitrack recorder and recording the stereo-mixed signals to a master (digital or analog) recorder. The internal mixdown mode, allows you to mix 16 internal tracks recorded on a program down to stereo signals and record them to the current drive of the unit. By using the internal mixdown function, you can make mixdown without the need for an external master re- corder. Furthermore, you can record an internally mixed material to a CD-RW/CD-R disc to make an audio CD. See page 125 for details. Recording Playback eo Tax 1 Track 2 — Ta 3 000000000000 Ta 4 Tauks —| T6 +) MIXING Ta 7 TRS Track 9 EQ Track 10 PAN TR El EFFECT Tak 12 + Ta | —+ CCE ES TakTs | Track 16 |— <lease read this first before executing mixdown!> After executing mixdown, a new program on which a mixed-down material is saved is automatically created on the current drive. The program number of this program is set to one greater than the current greatest program number. For example, if there are 8 programs (P01 through 08) on the current drive, by mixing down a desired program data, a new program (P09) is automatically created and the mixed-down stereo signals are re- corded on tracks 1 and 2 of PO9. Note that if the unit is under either of the following conditions, you cannot carry out internal mixdown. 1 There are 99 programs already existed on the current drive even though there is enough recording space. If you try to carry out internal mixdown, “Can't New PGM!” is shown and the operation is ignored. To carry out mixdown, delete an unnecessary program.

2. There is not enough recording space even though there are less than 99 programs on the current drive.

If you try to carry out internal mixdown, “Over time!” is shown and the operation is ignored. To carry out mixdown, erase unnecessary song data or delete an unnecessary program.

1. Selectthe program to be mixed down.

To select the desired program, press the [PGM SEL] key and select the program using the [J 06] dial, then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

2. When the unit is stopped, press the [DIRECT REC TRK]

key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. See the illustration below. [DIRECT REC TRK] key ISHIFT] key The program number/name shown on the Normal dis- play changes to “Int Mixdown” in inverse video, showing that the internal mixdown mode is now active, while the IDIRECT REC TRK] key flashes. In the example shown below, “PO8: Song Data-L” is mixed down. Each time you press the [DIRECT REC TRK] key while hold- ing down the [SHIFT] key, the mixdown mode alternates on and off. Normal display PGS: Sons Üata-i Sag: Init MixB

<Hint> If you press the [DIRECT REC TRK] key to activate the internal mixdown mode when the recording track(s) or source track(s) are set for “DIRECT re- cording” or “BUSS recording”, the following mes- sage (“Rec Mode Change!” and “Sure?”) appears. In this case, pressing the [ENTER/YES] key activates the internal mixdown mode. Pressing the [EXIT/NO] key cancels the operation.

Fec Mode Chanse! - “ya 18345608 Dean dE LEA <Note> After the internal mixdown recording is completed, the unit automatically quits the internal mixdown mode. The unit also automatically quits the internal mixdown mode when you complete performing any of the following while the internal mixdown mode is active. Therefore, if you want to continue the internal mixdown mode, you need to activate the mode again. «Program change «Program delete + Creating a new program *Formatting a disk + Copy/paste, Move/paste *Erase + Save to/load from DAT/adat <Note> If “Rec Protect” in the Setup mode is set to “ON”, you cannot carry out internal mixdown. If you try to perform the internal mixdown opera- tion, “Protected!” appears on the display. In this case, set “Rec Protect” in the Setup mode to “OFF” before performing the internal mixdown operation.

EN VFISOEx FOStex Rehearsing internal mixdown recording Before performing the actual mixdown recording, you can rehearse it while adjusting level, balance and sound character (EQ, effect, etc.) of each track. In the following description, we assumes that you are going to mixdown all program tracks (1 through 16) on which instruments or vocals are recorded, and headphones for monitoring are connected to the IPHONES] jack. <Note> Make sure that the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys of all the source and MASTER channels are lit (in the following example, all the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys should be lit). A channel whose [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key is unlit will not be mixed down.

1. Select the desired program to be mixed down.

To select the desired program, press the [PGM SEL] key and select the program using the [J 0G] dial, then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

2. Set the [MASTER] fader to the “0” position.

3. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning of the selected program.

4. During playback, adjust track levels using the channel

faders, as well as pan, EQ and effect settings if necessary. You can monitor the mix-down sound (in other words, stereo buss signals) through the headphones by raising the [PHONES] control. You can record the exact sound you are monitoring by executing the actual mixdown recording as described in “Performing internal mixdown recording”. You may playback the program repeatedly to tailor the sound by setting pan, EQ and effects until you are satisfied. For details about setting pan, EQ and effects, see the “Chapter 3 Advanced mixer operations”. <int> You can make internal mixdown recording with the “Scene sequence” function active. By executing the scene sequence after creating the scene event map, you can make mixdown recording while playing back materials according to the scene event map. However, only the scenes that are set for the di- rect recording can be recalled by the scene se- quence. Note that the scenes that are set for the buss re- cording cannot be recalled.

5. After completing all the adjustments, stop the unit and

locate the beginning of the program. You can locate the beginning of the program (ABS 0) quickly by pressing the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP] key. Now you are ready for actual internal mixdown recording.

Performing internal mixdown recording Note: There is no recording track selection> In the internal mixdown mode, unlike the normal record- ing, You do not have to select recording tracks. When executing the internal mixdown recording accord- ing to the following procedure, the unit automatically arms Tracks 1 and 2. Therefore, the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys never light up in red during the internal mixdown recording.

1. Press the [DIRECT REC TRK] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key to activate the internal mixdown mode. Make sure that the [DIRECT REC TRK] key flashes.

2. Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [RECORD]

key. The internal mixdown recording starts. Both the [DIRECT REC TRK] and [RECORD] keys light up. Sais Init Mix

12345608 A0udmaiSié dE LE

3. After completing internal mixdown recording, press the

[STOP] key to stop the unit. “Please Wait!” appears on the display for a few seconds. The internal mixdown mode quits and the unit locates the beginning (ABS 0) of the newly created (mixed-down) program. In the display example below, you can see the newly created program, whose number is “PO9”, is mixed down from “Song Data-L” data. We recommend to give a title of a mixed-down program starting by “Mix <#” to distinguish from other programs.

4. Check the result by playing back the mixed-down

program (“P09” in the example above). The playback levels of mix-down tracks can be adjusted using faders for channels 1 and 2. If you make an audio CD of the mixed material, read “Hint” on the next page in advance. Note: You cannot undo internal mixdown recording> If you are not satisfied with the result, try again from the beginning. You cannot undo internal mixdown recording. If you do not need the previously recorded program, delete the program by using “Delete” menu in the Setup mode.

<Hint> When internal mixdown is completed, the starting and editing times of the mixdown are registered as “CLIP- BOARD IN point” and “CLIPBOARD OUT point” respectively (see the illustrations below). This is because, when making an audio CD from the mixed-down material, data between “CLIPBOARD IN point” and “CLIPBOARD OUT point” is automatically recorded. Regardless of the starting point of mixdown, only the data between “CLIPBOARD IN point” and “CLIPBOARD OUT point” is recorded when making an audio CD. In other words, you cannot make an audio CD without setting these two points. CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point When internal mixdown starts from “ABS 0" and ends at A5 0 ABS 05M 00S 00F

“ABS 05M 00S 00F”. | 1

mixed-down song data CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point <Figure-1> When intemal mixdown starts from “ABS 00M 105 00F" and at'ABS 06M 005 00F”. ABS 0 ABS OOM 105 00F ABS 06 005 00F mixed-down song data However, if you make an audio CD from the material whose actual audio starts from the exact “CLIPBOARD IN point”, there will be no silence before starting audio. If you want to make a CD which have a silence before actual audio starts, move back the mixed-down data for a few seconds as shown in Figure-2, or move ahead the “CLIPBOARD IN point” for a few seconds as shown in Figure-3. CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point EuPROAD M it CLPBOARD OUT pont REC END

mixed-down song data [ mixed-down song data A85 0 Move & Pastà RECEND i ! ! RECEND EE mixed-down song data Dar nel mixed-down song data <Figure-2> <Figure-3> <Note> If you burn more than one mastered material which does not have "silent space" at the beginning and the end to a CD-R/RW disc, an audio CD that has no silent space between adjacent tracks is created. Therefore, in such a case, create à silent space by either of the methods shown above. See the explanation from the next page for details about the actual operations. <Note> When you move data as shown in Figure-2, the ©HPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point “CLIPBOARD IN point” is not changed, while the ure-4). If you record data to a CD-RW or CD-R disc with- out changing the CLIPBOARD OUT point, data between the CLIPBOARD IN and OUT points is ! “CLIPBOARD OUT point” moves (as shown in Fig- ABS 0 REC.END mixed-down song data | recorded but data between the CLIPBOARD OUT ‘ REC END and REC END points are not recorded. CUPÉOAGD IN pont COPEOM OUTRE Therefore, you have to set the “CLIPBOARD OUT Î mixed-down song data point” to the same point as the “REC END point” . or latter point. <Figure-4>

EN VFISOEx FOStex Inserting “silence” at the beginning of a song To insert “silence” at the beginning of a song, use ei- ther of the following methods depending on the start time. The following operations are assumed to be done when the time base is set to “ABS”. If you want to perform the operations with another time base (such as Bar/Beat), press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to change the time base in advance. When mixdown starts from “ABS 0” You can make a silence at the beginning of a program which is mixed down from “ABS 0” by using the “move & paste” technique. In the following description, we assumed that the cur- rent program is a 5-minute length program, in which the [CLIPBOARD IN] and [CLIPBOARD OUT] keys hold “00M 00$ 00F 00SF” and “O5M 00$ 00F 00SF” respec- tively, and audio immediately starts from ABS 0 (=00M O0S O0F O0SF). And you are now going to create a 3-second silent space at the beginning of the program.

• First, enter the “AUTO PUNCH IN” point, which is the destination for the paste operation.

1. Atthe beginning of the program (ABS 0), press the

THOLD/>] key. The current time is held and “S” on the display flashes, Showing that you can now edit the “second” field. Flashing

2. While “S”flashes, enter “03” using [J 0G] dial and press

the [STORE] key. “Hit Any Memory Keys!” appears on the display. Hit Ana Menara Kess! To edit another field than "second", use the THOLD/>] key (or [REWINDY/[F FWD] keys) to flash the appropriate point.

3. Press the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key.

Now the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key holds “00M 03S 00F 00SF” as the auto punch-in point, and the display returns to the Normal display.

4. After pressing the [E DIT] key, use the [J 0G] dial to

display “Move Clip?”. “Select Track!” appears together with “Move Clip?”. Mouse Clirr Select Track!

5. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys of channels 1 and

These [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys that start flashing in red, Showing that tracks 1 and 2 are selected to be moved.

6. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The “move” operation is immediately completed, and “Move Paste?” appears on the display. House Paster Press the [ENTER/YES] key again. The display for selecting the number of repeat times appears, in which “01” and “Sure?” flash. In this tutorial, leave the number as the initial “0! tous Paste Fereat=G}l

8. Press the [ENTER/YES] key again while

The move & paste operation is immediately completed and the program data now moved as shown below. When the move & paste operation is completed, “Completed!” appears on the display. CLIPBOARD IN point CLPBOARD OUT point 00 03 00F 00SF Î 00F : [ TS RS > As we mentioned earlier, if you make an audio CD in this condition, data after the “CLIPBOARD OUT point” will not be recorded. Therefore, you have to set the “CLIPBOARD OUT point” to the “REC END point”.

+ Change the “CLIPBOARD OUT point”.

9. When the unit is stopped, press the [F FWD] key while

holding down the [STOP] key. The unit immediately locates the “REC END point”.

10. Press the [STORE] key followed by the [CLIPBOARD

OUT] key. The “REC END point” is now registered as the “CLIPBOARD OUT point”. The display returns to the Normal display. By changing the “CLIPBOARD OUT point”, you can now cre- ate an audio CD without loosing the last part. When mixdown starts from non-“ABS 0” You can make a silence at the beginning of a program which is not mixed down from “ABS 0” by setting the “CLIPBOARD IN point” appropriately. In the following description, we assumed that the cur- rent program is a 5-minute length program which is mixed down from “ABS 00M 10S 00F 00SF”, in which the [CLIPBOARD IN] and [CLIPBOARD OUT] keys hold “00M 10S 00F 00SF” and “05M 10S 00F 00SF” respec- tively, and audio immediately starts from “00M 105 00F 00SF”. And you are now going to create a 3-second silent space at the beginning of the song. + Change the “CLIPBOARD IN point”.

1. When the unit stopped, press the [CLIPBOARD IN] key.

The time registered with the [CLIPBOARD IN] key is shown {in this tutorial, “ABS 00M 10$ 00F 00SF”), and “S” on the display flashes, showing that you can now edit the “second” field.

3. Press the [STORE] key followed by the [CLIPBOARD IN]

key. “00M 07S 00F 00SF” is registered with the “CLIPBOARD IN point”. Now you made a 3-second silent space at the beginning of the song by changing the “CLIPBOARD IN point”. See “Making an audio CD” in “Save/load using CD-RW/CD-R” described later for details about how to make an audio CD from the mixed-down song.

EN VFISOEx FOStex Applications of BUSS RECORD BUSS RECORD makes it possible to record all the source channel signals sent to REC BUSS L/R on either 2 tracks or 1 track. The source channel is selectable with the “IN (Input)” channel and “TRK (Track)” channel, therefore, it is possible to record the input signals along with signals that are already recorded. Record by mixing the input sound and play sound Here, we will mix the play sounds of tracks 1-4 with the signals input through [INPUT] A-D to record on tracks 7 and

Connectthe sound sources to record to [INPUT] A to D. Preparations to record

Press the [INPUT SEL] key (ORANGE: Flashing). The display to select “IN (Input)” - “TRK (Track)” appears. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch9-ch12 so it flashes ORANGE (ch9-ch12 ->“IN (Input)"). Press the [BUSS-SOURCE] key (GREEN: Flashing). The display to select the source channel appears. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch1-ch4 and the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch9-ch12. Ch1-4 and ch9-12 are set to the source channel. Press the [BUSS-REC TRK] key (RED: Flashing). The display to select the REC track appears. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch7 and ch8. Ch7 and ch8 are set as the REC track. The signals from ch1-4 and ch9-12 can not be recorded to tracks 7 and 8. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display. Setthe ch1-4, ch 788, and ch9-12 fader and master fader to "0". Press the [RECORD] key to go to the input monitor (RED: Flashing).

10. Setthe ch7/8 fader and PAN that is used to monitor the

Set the ch7 PAN to the LEFT (L) and ch8 PAN to the RIGHT (R). The position of the recorded signal can be checked. 1l. Adjustthe faders, PAN, equalizer and effect of each source channel (ch1-4 and ch9-12). The sound is recorded on track 7 by setting the source channel PAN to the LEFT. The sound is recorded on track 8 by setting the source channel PAN to the RIGHT. The sound is recorded on both tracks by setting the source channel PAN to the CENTER. When the preparations to record have been completed, start recording according to the basic "BUSS RECORD" instructions described earlier. Tips: How to adjustthe REC BUSS Master Level To adjust the REC BUSS Master Level, press the [BUSS- RECTRK]key then use the [J OG]dial while the follow- ing display is shown. The default setting of the REC BUSS Master Level is set to "80". However, this can be modified to a voluntary REC BUSS Master Level with the [ 0G] dial. After adjusting the level, press the LEXIT/NO] key. The Normal Display appears. The master level dur- ing recording appears on the level meter shown on the display below.

Ping-Pong RECORD By using BUSS RECORD), it is possible to select a maximum of 15 source channels when recording to 1 track and a maximum of 14 source channels when recording to 2 tracks. Here we will ping-pong record the sound recorded on tracks 1-14 onto tracks 15 and 16 for temporary mix down. Ping-pong RECORD refers to the process in which the sound of several tracks are mixed and then recorded on another track. Tak1 Track 2 Track 3

Track Track 12 LETEE) Track 14 Tak15 Trek 16 Preparations to record L. Press the [INPUT SEL]key (ORANGE: Flashing). The display to select “IN (Input)” -“TRK (Track)” appears.

The display to select the source channel appears. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch1-ch14. Ch1-8 and ch9-14 are set to the source channel.

5. Press the [BUSS-REC TRK] key (RED: Flashing).

The display to select the REC track appears.

6. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch15 and ch16

(RED: Flashing). Tracks 15 and 16 are set to the READY track.

7. Press the [E XIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display.

8. Press the [RECORD] key to go to the input monitor (RED:

9. Setthe ch15/16 fader and PAN that is used to monitor the

REC track. Set the ch15 PAN to the LEFT (L) and ch16 PAN to the RIGHT (R). The position of the recorded signal can be checked.

10. Adjust the faders, PAN, equalizer and effect of each

source channel (ch1-14 and ch9-12). The sound is recorded on track 15 by setting the source channel PAN to the LEFT. The sound is recorded on track 16 by setting the source channel PAN to the RIGHT. The sound is recorded on both tracks by setting the source channel PAN to the CENTER.

1l.To start recording, press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is depressed. Tips: How to adjustthe REC BUSS Master Level To adjust the REC BUSS Master Level, press the IBUSS-REC TRK] key then use the [J 0G] dial while the following display is shown. The default setting of the REC BUSS Master Level is set to "80". How- ever, this can be set to a voluntary REC BUSS Mas- ter Level with the [J 0G] dial. After adjusting the level, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The Normal Display appears. The master level while recording appears on the level meter shown on the display below.

The VF160EX incorporates a tempo map to set a desired bar/beat (4/4, 3/4, etc.) and tempo (30-250). It is possible to output a metronome sound, according to the setting of the tempo map. This allows for recording in sync with the rhythm output from the VF160EX without having to use an external metronome or rhythm box. Setting the tempo map Setting metronome output The user must first set the tempo map to output metro- nome sound. The tempo map can be set through the "Beat Setting" menu and "Tempo Setting" menu of the SETUP mode. The default setting of the tempo map is set to 4/4 bar/beat with a tempo of 120. The following procedures are unnecessary if the default setting does not have to be modified. The tempo map of the default setting means that the metronome sound will always click at a 4/4 beat and 120 tempo. L Press the [SETUP]key when theVF160EX is in the STOP mode, to go to the SETUP mode. The display to select a SETUP menu appears. Use the [J 0G] dial to select the "Signature Set" menu, then press the [ENTER/YES] key. The menu to set the beat appeai Beat" on page 99 for more detai the beat setting. After setting the beat, press the [E XIT/NO] key to return to the SETUP menu. Refer to "Setting the s on how to customize

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The menu to set the tempo appears. Refer to "Setting the Tempo" on page 135 for more details on how to customize the tempo setting. After setting the tempo, press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the SETUP menu. Next, proceed with the "Setting Metronome Output" procedure. The next step is whether to set the system to output metronome sound or not. This is done in the same manner as setting the tempo map and is set from the "Metronome Function Setting" menu in the SETUP mode. L Usethe[J 0G]dial to selectthe "Click?" menu, then press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set item (On or Off) flashes. The default setting is set to "Off".

2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select "On" (flashing), then press

the [ENTER/YES] key. The metronome function is now turned "On".

3. When the setting has been completed, press the [EXIT/

NO]key twice to escape from the SETUP mode. Setthe time base to the BAR/BEAT. L Press the [DISP SEL] key while the [SHIFT] key is depressed to switch the time base display to the "BAR/ BEAT" display. It is possible to check the bar/beat set in the tempo map by switching to the "BAR/BEAT" display. Checking metronome sound L Press the [PLAY] key to play the VF160. The metronome sound level appears on the level meter of ch16. At this time, turn up the master fader and fader of ch16 to "O", then use the [PHONES] knob or [MON OUT] knob to turn up the volume, to monitor the metronome sound. sible to output the metronome sound from ch16 as described above. It is also possible to use the metronome sound as a guide to record to ch1-15. 00900 000 "== nono

<Note> The metronome sound (clicking sound) cannot be heard unless ch16 is set to "TRK (Track). Press the [INPUT SEL] key to see that ch16 is set to "TRK", as shown in the display on the left. Use the ch16 fader to adjustthe output level ofthe metronome sound (clicking sound). <Caution> When the metronome function is no longer necessary, always go to the SETUP mode to turn OFF the metronome function. As long as the metronome function is ON, it is not possible to record on track 16, and any sounds already recorded on track 16 cannot be played.

Digital Recording This section will describe digital recording from external digital devices using the [DATA IN] connector of the VF160EX. Digital signals recorded are either S/P DIF or adat digital signals. Digital recording from an external digital device This section describes digital recording methods from external S/P DIF digital devices (CD, MD, DAT, etc.) or adat digital devices (Fostex D1624mklI, D824mklI, VC-8, etc.) into the VF160EX. dat digital signal or S/P DIF digital signal DIGITAL OUT VC-8& ts a <Caution (IMPORTANT)> To digitally record to the VF160EX, only input digital sig- nals (S/P DIF or adat) with the same sampling rate (44.1KHz/16bit) as the VF1G0EX. Selecting the program to record If several programs are set, use the program selection function to pre-start the program to record. Setting the digital input L SettheVF160EX l'input as shown below, from the ital In" menu in the SETUP mode. For more details on setup procedures refer to the "SETUP Mode" on page 141. <When recording S/P DIF digital signals > Set the "Digital In" (SPDIF) of the SETUP mode, as shown as an example below. With this setting the LEFT channel of the S/P DIF digital signal is recorded on track 1 and the RIGHT channel is recorded on track 2. As shown in this case, when selecting a S/P DIF digital signal it is possible to set odd and even tracks next to each other. SETUF Fi Lai FE ada

Hit TES or HO Ke DATA IN <When recording adat digital signals> Set the "Digital In" of the SETUP mode to "adat". SETUR R14 Disital In Analos EE ROZ | Se Hit TES or NO Ke This setting records the adat digital signals on ch1-ch8 on tracks 1-8. In other words, the ch1 signals are recorded on track 1, ch2 signals on track 2, and so on. Simply put, the digital signal is recorded on tracks corresponding to the adat digital signal channel. When the "Digital In" settings are completed, press the [EXIT/NO] key to escape from the SETUP mode. The LCD shows the Normal Display. Either “ Œn ” or “ M” lights up on the display, when proper digital signals (S/P DIF or adat) from an external digital device is input in DATA IN. If either “ EM ” or “ HG” flashes on the display it means that the digital signal input is incorrect. In such case check the connection cable and digital output setting of the external device. <Caution (IMPORTANT)> Do not make connections such as for input of S/P DIF digi- tal signals into the VF160EX DATA IN connector when “Digital In” is set to “adat”. It could result in abnormal symptoms such as reduction in operating speed of VF160EX and also create noise.

EN VFISOEx FOStex Selecting a track to record Stering to record Digital recording is only an option of "DIRECT RECORD" that was described in the section on basic recording choices. It is not possible to apply equalization or ef- fect on the signals recorded. L Press the [INPUT SEL]key. Check to see that ch9-ch16 are all setto "TRK". If any channel is set to "IN", modify the setting to "TRK".

2. Press the [DIRECT-REC TRK]key.

The display to select the REC track appears.

3. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the track that was

set with "Digital In". The [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of the channel selected flashes RED.

4. Press the [E XIT/NO] key to return to the Normal Display.

L Turn up the channel fader and master fader corresponding to the track recorded to "0".

2. Press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is

depressed to startrecording withVF160EX, as well as start playing the external digital device. The level meter of the digital signal level that is currently input will appear. There is no need to adjust the input level on the VF160EX for digital recording.

4. When recording is completed, press the [STOP] key to

stop theVF160EX and to stop the external digital device. <mportant> analog signals on the remaining tracks 3-16. If the track for digital recording is set from the "Digital In" menu of the SETUP mode, then tracks not assigned for digital REC can record analog signals at the same time. For example, if S/P DIF digital signals are recorded on tracks 1 and 2, it would then be possible to record With this function, it is possible to simultaneously record 16 tracks with adat digital and analog signals. However, the prerequisite is that "DIRECT RECORD"'is the recording option being used. For further details, refer to the section on "Recording 16 Tracks at the Same Time" described below. Recording 16 Tracks atthe SameTime This section describes how to simultaneously record a total of 16 tracks consisting of 8 analog signals and 8 adat digital signals. RECORD the 8 analog signals. 8 analog sound sources INPUT =H LUTTE mply put, tracks 1-8 record the adat digital signals from VC-8 or D824mkll and tracks 9-16 DIRECT Connecting a Sound Source or External Device D824mkll L Connectthe VC-8 or D824mkil to the [DATA IN] jack of the VF160E X.

2. Connect 8 sound sources into [INPUT] jacks A to H.

Setting the VC-8 or D824mkil Check adat signal and adjust monitor L SettheVC-8 or D824mkll so it outputs adat digital signals. For more details refer to the VC-8 or D824mklI User's Manual. Setting "Digital In" on the VF160E X 1 Setthe "Digital In" menu in the SETUP mode to "adat". For more details refer to the SETUP mode on page 141. REC Track and Master Fader settings

1. Press the [INPUT SEL]key.

Check to see that ch9-ch16 are set to “TRK (Track)”. If there is any channel that is set to “IN (Input)” switch it 10 “TRK”.

2. Press the [DIRECT-REC TRK]key, so all tracks are

READY. The REC track selected will appear on the display.

3. Press the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key of ch1-ch16 so all

tracks are READY. Now the adat digital signals (ch1-ch8) from VC-8 (or D824mkil) are recorded on tracks 1-8 and the input signals from [INPUT] A to H are recorded on tracks 9-16.

4. Press the [E XIT/NO] key and return to the Normal

Display. If normal adat digital signals from VC-8 (or D824mkll) are input into VF160EX, “ FI ” lights up on the Normal Display.

5. Setthe master fader to "0".

L Press the [RECORD] key. All tracks go to the input monitor status. Ifsignals are input from the VC-8 (or D824mkll) in this state, the input level appears on the level meters 1-8. To monitor the adat signals, turn the ch1-ch8 channel fader up to "0", and then turn up the [MON OUT] knob or IPHONES]knob. There is no need to adjust the REC level on the VF160EX. The channel fader procedures only adjust the monitor sound. Setting the analog input signal setting 1 Setthe channel fader of ch9 - ch16 to "0".

2. Adjust the input level with the [TRIM] for which each

sound source is input. Fine tune the input with the channel fader if The monitor sound can also be heard at this time. Starting to record L To start recording, press the [PLAY] key while the [RECORD] key is depressed. When recording starts, the adat digital signals from VC-8 (or D824mkIl) are input along with the signal input of the analog sound source. This allows recording of 8 analog signals (8 channels) and 8 adat digital signals (8 channels) for recording on 16 tracks at the same time. MIDI Clock Sync System By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the VF160EX, and by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting, a hardware type MIDI sequencer can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this system, the VF160EX will be the master and the MIDI sequencer the slave. MIDI clock & song position ponter moin} MIDIIN— MIDIOUT. MIDI Sequencer MIDI Sound Source 000000200200 000 == STOUTL,R Master Recorder

EN VFISOEx FOStex [el onnecting external equipment 5. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT]

1. Connectthe VF160EX MIDI OUT to MIDIIN ofthe MIDI key, and then change the time base display to BAR/BEAT/

2. Setthe MIDI sequencer for “external sync mode C onfirming the MIDI clock sync

{EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock Durnerecordneand Had ne the recordi . ; uring recording and at playback following the recording, the Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use for time base (BAR/BEAT/CLK) is displayed in accordance to the details. setup tempo map, and the MIDI clock and song position pointer is also output. Setup oftheVF160EX Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of the 1 Becausethe MiDIclock and song position pointer will VF160EX and the travel position of the synchronized MIDI be output from the VF160EX, setthe SETUP mode “MIDI sequencer are matched. sync signal output setting” to “CLK." If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the connections/ Refer to page “137”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output cables and setting of both equipment. setting” for correct operating procedures. ñ n ur : Note>

2. The meterin the desired bar can be setby ‘Time signature In the VF160EX, the “ABS 0” position is set at “-002BAR/

setting” of the SETUP mode. 1BEAT /00CLK.”_ This setting is made in consideration of Refer to page “133”, SETUP mode “Time Signature Setting” the time required (it will not sync immediately) for the MIDI for operating procedure. sequencer, etc. to enter into sync. As a result, if the VF160EX is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and will thus synchronize from head of the tune.

3. Tempo in the desired bar can be set by “Tempo setting”

ofthe SETUP mode. Refer to page “135”, SETUP mode “Tempo Setting” for operating procedure.

4. Setthe SETUP mode “Metronome setting” to “On”’if click

soundis to be output according to the setup tempo map. Refer to page “136”, SETUP mode “Metronome setting” for operating procedure. C Sync/MIDI Machine Control System The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output and the computer controlling system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this system, the VF1G60EX will be the master and the computer (with sequence software) will be the slave. The VF160EX will attach any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time (absolute time) and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate. It can also carry out the proper operation upon receiving an MMC from outside. In this case, because the VF1GOEX can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode “MIDI Device ID Setting” menu, a multiple number of the VF160EX’s can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICE 1D numbers in the transmitted message from the computer. muc Execution of recording Various ways of recording can be conducted while synchronizing the VF160EX and the MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock. moin MIDI Sound Source

Connecting to external equipment

Connectthe VF160E X MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with MIDI interface) MIDI IN/OUT. MMC/MTC complied sequence software is activated in the computer. Setup of external equipment

Setup the following in the sequence software. Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC). Set for output of MMC. Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate. Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first bar). Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset, farther on. #4 x For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external equipment. Setup of the VF160E X

Because MTC will be output from the VF160EX, set to “MTC "the SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting.” Refer to page “137”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting” for operating procedure. Set a random offsettime by the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting.” Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure. In the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting,” whether the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output (ABS) atthe ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or atthe 001BAR 1BEAT O00CLK (bar, signature) must be selected. Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure. Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the sequence software by “MTC Frame rate setting” ofthe SETUP mode. Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details. Setto the same figure as the sequence software MMC device number by the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting.” When the sequence software transmits by “7F”, it means “ALL DEVICE” and therefore, it need not be setup. Refer to page “143”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting” for operating procedure and details. Press the [DISP SEL]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to show time base in the MTC display.

<Notes on MTC related setups> By “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting,” at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/ OOCLK) should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be output is set. When setting the start time of the tune in the sequence software by these setups, be careful of the following points. *Offset mode: For ABS Ifplayback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be output starting from the MTC offset time that has been set, the start time of the tune set by the sequence software must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset time that was setup. This will provide time because the sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC is output. For example, if the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s 00f00sf” is used, set the start time of the tune to “01h 00m 00$ 00f.” If playback is thus started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS O0), sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of the tune. *Offset mode: For BAR As mentioned before, because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “O02BAR / 1BEAT / OOCLK” position, the setup MTC offset time can be set to the head of the tune without taking into account the time until reaching sync, as mentioned above. The length of the time two bars beforehand will change in accordance to the first bar setting for “signature” and “tempo.” For example, it will be long if the tempo is set slow. This mode can be effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC in parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while controlling the recorder with time base BAR/BEAT/CLK.

During recording and at playback after recording, time base MTC is displayed according to the setting and MTC is output at the same time. Check that the VF160EX traveling position (MTC) and the traveling position of the sequence software in sync are matched. Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the VF160EX will be properly controlled. When a correct MIDI command (MM) is received, “MIDI” in the display will be lit for about 40msec. There is no setting in the VF160EX to receive MMC but it will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input. If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check connections/cables and the setting of both equipment. xecution of recording Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the VF160EX and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock.

VAFISOEX FOSstex External MIDI Equipment Sync System by the Slave mode Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the VF160EX as the master and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting, the MIDI equipment can be set as the master and the VF1GOEX as the slave. mTe mibi our | Computer System MMCINTC sofiware!

MIDLIN 600" Don Connection to external equipment

Connect MIDI OUT of the computer (with MIDI interface) with MIDI IN of the VF160E X. The computer sequence software complying to MMC/MTC must be activated. Setup of external equipment

Sequence software is setup as follows.

• Set for output of MTC.

• Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.

• Confirm start time of the tune. Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment for details. Setup of the VF160E X

Setto same frame rate as the sequence software by the SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting.” Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details. Setto the desired mode by the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting!” Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure and details. A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting.” Refer to page “138”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure and details. Setslave mode to “On” by the SETUP mode “Slave mode setting.” Refer to page “139”, SETUP mode “Slave mode setting” for operating procedure and details.

5. Set slave type to “Vari” by the SETUP mode “Slave type

setting.” Refer to page “140”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting” for operating procedure and details. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, to change the time base display to MTC. <recautions at MTC related setups> The position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/O0CLK) when the setup MTC (MTC offset time) should be output was setup by the “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting.” In accordance to start time of the tune set by the sequence software, setup as explained below. *Offset mode: For ABS Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the start time of the tune set by the sequence software. Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock after input of MTC, in order to sync the unit from head of the tune, set the preroll using the sequence software, and playback from before the actual head of the tune to allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives at the head of the tune. -Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the start time of the tune set by the sequence software. Because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “O02BAR/1BEAT/ OOCLK” position in the unit, as mentioned before, the preceding time required for sync is already set. The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in Length depending on the first bar's “signature setting” and “tempo setting” mentioned before. For example, it will be longer if the tempo is slowed down.

Confirming chase lock diote> 1 When the sequence software is played, “CHASE” and Normally, when “Setup of slave type” is set to “Vari”, the “MTC”in the display will be light and the chase lock will VF160EX will be constantly controlled by vari-pitch and be completed. follow the MTC, which is the master. Check that the MTC output by the sequence software and However, if the digital input is set to “SPDIF” or “adat” MTC time displayed in the VF160EX are the same. via the SETUP mode “Setup of digital input,” it will be in “Word clock external sync operation” by the digital

2. When the sequence software stops, MTC will be signal (S/P DIF or adat) thatisinput. ,

interrupted and the VF160EX will also stop. Therefore, it must be noted that when “Setup of digital “CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking. input” is executed, even though “Setup of slave type” is set to “Varÿ”, it will not follow by application of vari-pitch . and upon completion of lock, it will change to external

3. During FF/REW ofthe sequence software,theVF160E X will sync operation by the digital input signal.

remain stopped but upon starting to record, the VF160E X willimmediately chase lock. Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check connections/cables and all settings. <One Point Advice> Sync signal “Vari” of the “Slave mode setting” menu: When the VF160EX is made to chase lock by MTC only, variable pitch will be constantly applied by external MTC. If a digital signal is output to an external digital equipment from the VF160EX, it will not be able to follow the speed difference (MTC speed difference of the master) of the VF160EX and the external digital equipment, in some cases, may not be able to input a continuous digital signal. As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to “Free” by the “Slave mode setting” menu. Using this setting, the VF160EX will enter self operation by the internal clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will be possible to supply a stable digital signal to the external equipment. Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames, the VF160EX will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the slave recorder will carry out position matching again with the master unit (re-chase operation). During the re-chase operation, sound output will be muted and the digital signal will also be interrupted. [fit is within 10 frames, the slave recorder will continue to run while admitting this drift. Execution of recording

1. Carry out various recordings while the recorder is chase

locked to the sequence software. <Note> Chase lock of the VF160EX by MTC only is permissible when speed difference of the MTC from the master is within +/-5.6%. Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch will be constantly applied internally for chasing. Chase lock, however, will not function against MTC at a speed difference outside this range. Also, when the master speed difference is large, it is advised to let the VF160EX learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to recording. By doing so, it will be lock faster from the second and later sessions.

EN VFISOEx FOStex Application example of "Adat Mixer Mode The following is an application example of "Adat Mixer Mode" (= input monitor for all tracks). The "Adat Mixer Mode" is especially useful when using the VF160EX with a personal computer containing a built-in sound card, as shown below. In this system example, the VF1GOEX acts as; < A monitor mixer for the audio tracks of the personal computer. Channel faders 1 through 8 act in that capacity. + A/D converters for converting analog instrument signals to digital signals which are then sent to the personal computer. + Finally, a monitor mixer for MIDI sound sources. Channel faders 9 through 14 act in the capacity. All the signals above can be simultaneously recorded to tracks 1 through 16. <Notes>

• The "Adat Mixer Mode" can only be used via DIRECT recording. It cannot be used with BUSS recording. If an attempt is made to activate the "Adat Mixer Mode" when the recording mode is set to the BUSS mode, the display will show "Rec Mode Change!" with a flashing "Sure?". If you press the [ENTER/YES] key, the recording mode changes to the DIRECT mode and activates the "Adat Mixer Mode". If you press the [EXIT/NO] key, "Adat Mixer Mode" will be canceled and the recording mode will remain the same. + Tracks set to "IN (input)” via "INPUT SEL" selection (“IN” or “TRK”) will not be input monitor mode when the "Adat Mixer Mode" is active. FE ua mDun mou _[morour MIDI Sound Source = Computer System with à MIDI/audio mont morour| sm Léstour integrated software aexour] | supparing MMCIMTC

0dE = equipped with the ( <s à ” - ; Adat optical nput 00000 ON © == BHH0 Control the monitor levels of audio tracks Lthrough 8 ofthe personal computer.

VESASAE AIONEBMANN dE LA Adjusts the master level. Control the monitor levels of Control the monitor levels of analog MIDI sound sources. instruments. Setup ofthe VF160EX 2. Connectthe MIDI OUT connectors of the personal computer to the MIDI IN connectors of the MIDI sound 1 Setboth "digital input" and "digital output" settings in the source device and theVF160EX, and connect MIDI sound Setup mode to "adat". sources to the VF160EX inputs 1 through 6. See pages “141” and “142” for details about settings.

3. Connectanalog sound sources (such as mic, guitar, etc.)

2. When the Normal display is shown, press the [INPUT SEL] to inputs 7 and 8.

key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to make the "Adat Mixer Mode" active. 4. Connect the VF160E X [MIDI OUT] connector to the [MIDI IN]connector ofthe personal computer, and feed MTC from . . the VF160E X to the computer. Connection to external equipment L ConnecttheVF160EX [DATA IN] and [DATA OUT] connectors respectively to the adat IN and adat OUT connectors ofthe personal computer containing a sound card.

FostexX VAFISOS< EN Chain play functio The chain play function allows you to play back programs in order according to the “chain play list”. As examples in figure 1, you can play back programs in order of program number or in desired order. playing back in program order | Program 1 [—%| Program 2 |[—w| Program 3 |—@| Program 4 <Figure-1> playing back in random order | Program 1 |—%| Program 5 |—@| Program 8 |—@e | Program 4 You can play the whole (i.e. from ABS 0 to REC END) of each program in the chain play list as shown in figure 2, as well as a desired part(*) of each program as shown in figure 3. (*) A desired part can be specified as a range between the Auto Return Start and Auto Return End points. Therefore, if a program does not have both the Auto Return Start and End points which are correctly set, the whole program (from ABS 0 to REC END) is played back. See page 35 of the owner’s manual for details about how to set the Auto Return Start and End points. Auto Rin Start Auto Rin End nes 0 REC END point point Pssssssessessesseeeessess = H Program Program [D] Auto Rin Start point Auto Rin End int

ABS 0 REC END ones >: Y Y Je ! AubRn Stat À REC END pq Auto Rn End point Ÿ *- # <Figure-2> <Figure-3> In addition, you can select a playback mode for the chain play function from among “Pause”, “A. Play” and “Repeat” (see below for details about each mode). In this mode, the VF160EX plays back each program in the chain play list one by one. Pause Each time the VF160EX finishes playback of a program, itautomatically pauses atthe start point ofthe next program. Pressing the [PLAY ]key starts playback. In this mode, the VF160EX plays back all programs in the chain play list continuously. A. Play After finishing playback ofthe last program, the VF 160EX pauses atthe start point ofthe first program. Pressing the [P LAY]key again starts playback of all programs in the chain play list continuously. In this mode, the VF160EX plays back all programs in the chain play list continuously and repeatedly Repeat until you press the [STOP]key.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Making the chain play list Before executing chain play, you must make the chain play list by selecting the desired (or all) programs in the desired order. You can enter up to 99 programs to the chain play list. On pages 98 and 99, two procedure examples for entering programs on the VF160EX current drive to the list are shown. The former example shows how to enter all programs on the current drive, while the latter shows how to enter desired programs. Both examples assume that 10 programs exist on the current drive. 1 WhiletheVF160EX is stopped, press the [SETUP]key.

3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

The VF160EX enters the setup mode and the display changes to show the “Select Menu” screen for selecting a setup menuitem. By default, the “Signature Set” flashes as shown in the figure below. EMPO Set Title Edit Delete Clicka Off Use the [J 0G] dial to select “Chain Play List” which is the 23rd menu item (R23) in the setup menu, and then press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display changes to show the “Chain Play List” screen, in which “COL:END” is highlighted by default. “CO1” shows the step number, while “END” shows no program is entered to the chain play list. “Éhain Élas Of Fader Fix FF Chain Plas List CG 1 : END “END” starts flashing and you can now enter a desired program to step O1. UE Flas List }

By rotating the [JOG] dial while “END” is flashing, you can select a desired option from among the programs on the drive (“PO1” through “P10”), as well as “ALL”, “INS” and “DEL”. See the table below for details about each option. The current and succeeding steps in the chain play END | listare all deleted. (See ‘Deleting all programs from the chain play list” described later for details.) All programs on the current drive are entered to the chain play list. Note that you can select'ALL"to step ALL |1(C01)only There is no “ALL'option on othersteps. (See ‘Making the chain play list by selecting all the programs” described later for details.) A desired program can be added (inserted) to the INS | currentstep. (See ‘nserting a program to the chain play list’ described later for details.) The program on the current step is deleted. (See DEL |‘Deleting a program from the chain play list” described later for details.) A desired program is entered to the current step. If POL | another program is already entered, the new _ program overwrites it. You can select any ofthe programs on the current drive. (See “Making the chain play list by selecting desired programs” described later for details.) Making the chain play listby selecting allthe programs The following procedure example shows how to enter all the programs (PO1 through P10) on the current drive to the chain play list. L While “END”is flashing, rotate the [J OG] dial to select “ALL”, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. By rotating the [JOG] dial to the left, you can find “ALL” easily. By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting “ALL”, all programs on the current drive are entered to the chain play list, as shown in the screen example below. SETUR By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can scroll through the list to check the chain play list. In the last line on the list, “C11: END” is shown, which shows that no more program is entered after step 11.

2. Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The chain play list is made and the “Chain Play List” screen is dismissed. The display returns to the “Select Menu” screen, where the current option of the “Chain Play” menu item flashes (by default, “Off” flashes) and you can now set the chain play mode. For details about how to set the chain play mode, see “etting the chain play mode” on page 99. <Note> If a program which participates in the chain play list is deleted from the drive(see “Deleting a program” in the owner’s manual), the whole play list is cleared (it returns to show “CO1: END"). If you select the “Delete” menu item of the Setup mode and press the [ENTER/YES] key, the display shows the warning message (“[ WARNING] Delete Play List too?”). Making the chain play list by selecting desired programs The following procedure example shows how to enter the five desired programs (from among 10 programs on the current drive) to steps 1 through 5 in the chain play list, as below. :C01-> program 5 (PO5) :C02 -> program 3 (PO3) :C03-> program 1 (PO1) :C04-> program 2 (PO2) :C05 -> program 4 (PO4) L While“END”is flashing on the screen, rotate the [J 0G] dial to select“P05” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. You can select the desired program by rotating the [JOG] dial to the right. When selecting the program, the first nine characters of the program name is also shown (in the example below, the name is “#0005”). After selecting “POS” and pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, program 5 (POS) is set to step 1 (COL) of the chain play list and the screen changes as shown below. rss Play List} | Cal: CHOAGS 1 Chain Flas Listr- 1: PAS CHAGGS 1

[ENTER/YES] key. s with procedure step 1) above, “END” of “CO2: END” se Plas List | TEE RES j “END’is flashing on the screen, rotate the [J 0G] dial to select“P03” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. As with procedure step 1) above, program 3 (PO3) is set to step 2 (CO2) of the chain play list and the screen changes as shown below. Cal: CE: CHGGES CHAAAS BUxE Plas List Set programs to steps 3 through 5 (C03 through CO5) of the chain play list with the same manner as above.

4. After completing setting all the desired programs to the

chain play list, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The chain play list is made and the “Chain Play List” screen is dismissed. The display returns to the “Select Menu” screen, where the current option of the “Chain Play” menu item flashes (by default, “Off” flashes) and you can now set the chain play mode. For details about how to set the chain play mode, see “Setting the chain play mode” on page 99.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Setting the chain play mode When you have made the chain play list, set the chain play mode. The following procedure shows how to set the chain play mode after making the chain play list as described before. L While“OFF”which is the current option ofthe “Chain Play” mode setting is flashing on the screen, rotate the D 0G] dial to select a desired chain play mode option. You can select a chain play mode option from among “Pause”, “A. Play” and “Repeat”, besides “Off”. ETES Henu - Select lenu

ain Plag Notes when the chain play mode is set to any option but “Off”> + When the chain play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you cannot make the auto punch mode or auto function mode active. If you are going to make either of them active, “[WARNING] Void! Chain Play” is shown and the operation is invalid. + _ Whensetting the chain play mode to “Repeat” and exiting the setup mode, the recorder automatically starts playback from the start point (the ABS 0 or Auto Return Start point )of the first program in the chain list. (When setting the chain play mode to “Pause” or “A. Play” and exiting the setup mode, the recorder moves to the beginning of the first program in the chain list. + _ Whenthe chain play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you can change the current program (by [PGM SEL] key) only from among the programs set to the chain play list (see “Selecting a program from the chain play list” on page 100). Fader Fix Or Notes on playing back the chain play list> When the play mode is set to any option but “Off”, the recorder immediately locates to the start point of the ee El Li program set to step 1 (CO1) in the play list, and then Ehain ÊTES lé-rre stops. Fader Fix __Ofr tops: If you move the recorder to a position out of the range Notes> e_ The chain play mode setting returns to the default setting (“OFF”) when turning off the power or executing play list editing (described later). Therefore, each time you want to carry out chain play after turning on the power or executing play list editing, you must set the chain play mode. e__ If you are going to set the chain play mode while the chain play list has not been made, “WARNING] Illegal Play List!” is shown and the setting is invalid.

2. After selecting the desired option, press the [ENTER/

YES]key. The VF160EX enters the selected play mode, while the Setup mode exits. The display shows the beginning (ABS 0, or the Auto Return Start point) of the program set to step 1 in the play list. In this condition, pressing the [PLAY] key starts playback of the play list by the selected play mode (if the play mode is set to “A. Play” or “Repeat”, playback starts automatically). The current play mode is shown for a few seconds after starting playback, as shown in the example below (in this example, the play mode is set to Auto Play). es ü Co1 Pl: #0001 The normal screen | SÿB: Imit MixE example when setting the play mode Res Cg1 Auto Plas The example ofthe | 84, fute las play mode display

between the Auto Return Start and End points (or after the REC END point), “Out of Zone” is shown instead of the step number. In such a condition, the recorder does not correctly execute chain play. The worst case is that you start chain play when the recorder position is after the Auto Return End point (or the REC END point). The recorder never moves to the next program. To move the recorder to the start point of a program, reselect a program you want to start chain play from by following the procedure described below.

FostexX VAFISOS< EN Selecting a program in the chain play list If the play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you can select a program only from those set to the chain play list. By selecting a program, you can start chain play from the desired step in the chain play list. <Note> If you want to select any program on the disk, as usual, turn off the power and then on, or set the chain play mode to “Off” (see “Setting the chain play mode”). In the following procedure, it is assumed that the chain play list has been made, the play mode is set to an

ption but “Off”, and the program set to the first step f the chain play list is loaded. L Whilethe recorderis stopped, press the [PGM SEL]key.

After showing “Select Change No!” immediately, the display changes to show the screen as below, on which the current program list number and “Sure?” flash. In this condition, you can select another program set in the list by rotating the [JOG] dial. Col Auto Plas SGg:Init MixE Côi:PO1CG8Gi ]

Use the [J 0G] dial to selectthe desired step and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The program set to the selected step is loaded and the recorder is stopped at the beginning of the program (ABS 0), while the display shows the Normal screen. In the screen examples below, program 4 (PO4) set to step 4 (CO4) is selected. Cü4 PO: #0064 Sag:init MixE As described above, by selecting a program while the

hain play mode is set to any option but “Off”, you an start chain play from the desired program. Editing the chain play list You can replace a program in the chain play list with another program, delete a program from the list, or add a new program to the list. Deleting (or replacing) a program in the chain play list You can delete a desired program from the chain play list or replace a program in the list with another program by following the procedure below. 1 While the recorder is stopped, press the [SE TUP]key to enter the setup mode. The screen for selecting a menu item in the setup mode appears.

Usethe |] OG]dial to select“Chain Play List”, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display changes to shows the “Chain Play List” screen as below. TUF R24 ain Plan Fader Fix of

Use the [J 0G] dial to selectthe step you want to edit, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The program number set to the selected step starts flashing. In the example below, “PO3” which is set to step 3 (C03) is flashing. Cé1:F 61 C'HOEE 1 be CHAOS CHAGES CHagäd Cas: POS CH#AGGS

4. Usethe[] 0G]dial to select“DEL” (or a desired program)

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. To delete the program from the chain play list, select “DEL”, To replace the program with another program, select a desired program.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex If you delete the program from the list, all the programs set to the subsequent steps automatically slide up, as shown below. SETUP F: Chain Plas List CHGGEd ÊSCHAGËS If you select selected step is replaced and other steps are not affected (in the following example, “PO3” set to “CO3” is replaced with “PO8”).

CHGGE 1 CHGDEe To delete (or replace) another program, repeat the procedure shown above.

5. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit the “Chain Play List”

screen. The display returns to the “Select Menu” screen where the current option of the “Chain Play” mode setting is flashing. Note> If you delete or replace a program in the chain play list when “Chain Play” is set to any option but “Off”, the “Chain Play” setting automatically changes to “Off” (which is the default). Therefore, to execute chain play after editing the chain play list, you must make the “Chain Play” mode setting appropriately again. Deleting all programs from the chain play list You can delete all the program in the chain play list simultaneously. L Follow procedure steps 1) and 2) on page 100 to show the “Chain Play List”screen. (.e. enter the setup mode and select “Chain Play List”.)

While step 1 (CO1)is highlighted (selected), press the IENTER/YES] key. The program number set to step 1 (PO1) starts flashing. If step 1 (“CO1”) is not highlighted, use the [JOG] dial to select step 1 and press the [ENTER/YES] key. Sue Flas List

3. Usethe[] OG]dialto select“END”and press the [ENTER/

YES]key. All the programs in the list are deleted at once and the screen Shows elow (“COT: END” is shown in the chain play list, which means no program is entered to the list). Note> If you select any step but “CO1” in procedure step

2) above and follow procedure step 3), programs

set to the selected and subsequent steps are deleted from the list. For example, if you set “END” tostep 3 (C03) in the chain play list where ten steps are currently set, programs set to steps 3 through 10 are all deleted, while programs set to steps 1 and 2 remain.

4. Press the [EXIT/NO]key repeatedly until the setup mode

exits. The “Chain Play” mode setting is automatically changed to “Off”.

FostexX VAFISOS< EN Inserting a program to the chain play list You can insert a program to a desired step in the current chain play list. L Follow procedure steps 1) and 2) on page 100 to show

the “Chain Play List” screen. (i.e. enter the setup mode and select “Chain Play List”.) Use the [J 0G] dial to select a step where you want to add a program and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The program number set to the selected step starts flashing. If you select “CO2” on the left screen example below, “PO2” starts flashing. Chain Plas List Usethe[] OG]dial to select“INS”’and press the [ENTER/ YES]key. You can now select a program to be inserted. Initially, “PO1” flashes. As you can see by comparing the two screen examples above, the programs set to the second and subsequent steps slide down automatically. Chain Plas List Léa:

Céd: Pod C#agd Cas: FOSCHAGGS Use the [J 0G] dial to select a program to be inserted, and press the [ENTER/YES] key. In the example shown below, program 6 (P06) is inserted to step 2. Cal

Éte CROGE au HOBIAS If you want to insert a program to another step, repeat the same procedure above. <Note> You can enter up to 99 programs to the play list. If you are trying to enter a program to the play list where 99 programs are already registered, “Void! Play List is Full” is shown and the operation is canceled. Afterinsertingall desired programs, press the [E XIT/NO] key. The “Chain Play List” screen is dismissed and the display returns to the “Select Menu” screen where the current option of the “Chain Play” mode setting is flashing. <Note> If you insert the desired program(s) to the chain play list when the “Chain Play” mode is set to any option but “Off”, the “Chain Play” setting automatically changes to “Off” (the default). Therefore, to execute chain play after editing the chain play list, you must set the “Chain Play” mode appropriately again. After setting the “Chain Play” mode appropriately, press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Audio CD playback mode This mode allows playing back an audio CD (regardless of whether it is made using the VF160EX or on the market) using the CD-R/RW drive (model CD-1A/EX). By switching the HDD playback mode to the audio CD playback mode, you can operate the CD-R/RW drive from the transport keys ([PLAY], etc) on the VF1GOEX panel for monitoring an audio CD. <Notes> e_ You cannot play back an audio CD which is copy-protected. e_ Never try to play back a disc which is not an audio CD (CD-DA). This may damage the VF160EX. °+_Inthe audio CD playback mode, you can use functions such as locate, scrub, auto function and effect editing, as with internal HDD playback. However, note that the access speed is not guaranteed. Switching the playback mode When turning the power on, the VF1G0EX always starts up in the internal HDD playback mode. In the following description, it is assumed that the CD-R/RW drive is installed to the VF160EX and an audio CD (burned using the VF160EX or on the market) is inserted to the drive. *When the HDD is stopped, press the [SCRUB/CD PLAY] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. After the associated warning message as shown below appears, the playback mode changes. Executing the above operation alternatively switches the playback mode. O0 DOC iscRUBCDLATIKey CE 5 the HDD playback mode to the audio CD playback mode

FostexX VAFISOS< EN Available functions in the audio CD playback mode In the audio CD playback mode, only the [CH STATUS/ CH SEL] keys for tracks 1, 2 and [MASTER] are lit, while the other [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys are unlit, showing that only the faders for track 1, 2 and [MASTER] are effective. (This means that the playback level of the audio CD is adjusted using the faders for tracks 1, 2 and [MASTER]. In the audio CD playback mode, the following functions are available. If you are going to carry out any function other than the following, a warning message is shown and the operation is ignored (for example, if you press the [RECORD] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, “[WARNING!] Void Key CD PLAYER” is shown. *Normal playback Effect, EQ and pan controls You can use the effect, EQ and pan controls for tailoring the playback sound.

• For details about the effect function, see pages 41 and 52 in the owner’s manual.

• For details about the EQ function, see pages 40 and 51 in the owner’s manual.

• For details about the pan control, see pages 40 and 50 in the owner’s manual. *Ejecting an audio CD In the audio CD playback mode and when the VF160EX is not accessing the disc, you can eject a disc in the CD-R/RW drive by pressing the [EXIT/ NO] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, or pressing the eject key on the CD-R/RW drive. «Display time mode selection You can play back an audio CD with the same manner as with a program in the internal HDD. You can control the playback level using the faders for tracks 1, 2 and [MASTER]. <Note> If you press the [PLAY] key, the key indicator flashes for a while. This shows that the system is in preparation for audio CD playback. When itis ready, playback starts. Track skip If an audio CD contains more than one track, pressing [REWIND/PREV] or [F FWD/NEXT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key skips a track. By pressing the key, “Locate: EVT **” (** shows the event number) is shown on the display, and the playback position skips (locates) to the beginning of the appropriate track. ‘Auto functions When the Start and End points are correctly set, the auto functions (Auto play, Auto return, Auto repeat, etc.) are available.

• See page 69 of the owner’s manual for details about the auto functions. Varipitch playback You can use the varipitch playback function which allows to alter the playback speed within +/- 6.0 % range in 0.1 % increments/decrements.

• For details about the varipitch function, see page 68 in the owner’s manual.

By pressing the [DISP SEL] key, you can select the time mode on the display from among “ABS”, “Offset” and “MTC”. For details about the time mode selection In the internal HDD playback mode, see page 30 of the owner’s manual.

• See the next page for details about the time display.

EEE VFISOE< FOStex Display in the audio CD playback mode When switching to the audio CD playback mode, the display looks like the example below. By pressing the [DISP SEL]key while holding down the [SHIFT]key, you can switch the time base. By pressing only the [DISP SEL]key, you can switch the display mode in the current time base. See the table below for details. This section shows the current track number and name. In the audio CD playback mode, only the In this example, “CDO1" shows the current track number level meters fortracks 1, 2 and L/R master is “01”. On the rightofthe track number, the track name is are effective. The playback level can be shown when playing back a CD TEXT disc (an audio CD controlled using the faders for tracks 1, 2 containing text information) which has track title and [MASTER], information. lfthe name is long and exceeds the display area, itis scrolled in the next row. When playing back a normal audio CD (which does not contain textinformation) available on the marketor bumed using the VF160EX, “No Title”is shown, as this example. When an audio CD which has more than one track is set, pressingthe [RE WIND/PREV]or[F FWD/NEXT]key while holding down the [SHIFT] key locates to the beginning of an appropriate track while the display shows “Locate: EVT#". + Time base display mode selection by the [SHIFT] key and [DISP SEL] key Disc elapsed time is shown. The time starts from the beginning of a disc. The loop start ABS : ; : and end points refers to disc elapsed time. OFFSET Track elapsed time is shown. Tracktime starts from the beginning ofeach track. Naturally, atthe point each track starts playback, the display shows “00m00s". MTC MTC (MIDI Time Code) is shown. lthas an offset of 59 minutes 57 seconds to “ABS 0" {the same offset as the internal HDD playback mode). + Display mode selection in the current time base by the [DISP SEL] key When the current time base is ABS You can switch between “ABS”, “OFFSET”and ‘MTC IN”. When the current time base is OFFSET: You can switch between “OFFSET”and ‘MTC IN”. When the current time base is MTC You can switch between “MTC”, “OFFSET”and “MTC IN”. MTC IN: Show the MTC time input in the [MIDI IN] jack.

Chapter 6 Save/Load of song data

You can save or load the desired song data using an S/PDIF digital signal, adat digital signal, as well as the CD-R/ RW drive (Model CD-1A/EX). The file formats you can use are the FDMS-3 (Fostex Digital Management System-3) and WAV. This function allows you to save finished or unfinished song data, including audio data and various SETUP information, to an external digital recorder or CD-R/RW drive, and load the data later. You can also make an original audio CD (CD-DA) using a CD-RW/CD-R disc. *kkkkkA bout song data*tFrt The format and time required for the save/load operations are different between each method. ‘Using the S/PDIF digital signal (you can save/load data for each program individually.): Five seconds after the pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), the song data is output to an external DAT recorder. The audio data is divided into data blocks of track pairs (shown in black in the diagram below) and transferred. To save data for all Real and Additional tracks (totally 24 tracks), 12 two-track units of data are transferred. Therefore, it will take about 12 times as much as the recorded time of a program (from ABS 0 to REC END) to save all the data recorded on the program. When loading song data from a DAT to the VF160EX, data is transferred with two-track data blocks, the same as saving data. (See also <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF or adat digital signal> on the next page.) [Program 1 (P01) | Program 2 (P02) ]-- Program 99 (P99) ‘Using the adat digital signal (you can save/load data for each program individually.): Five seconds after the pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), the song data is output to an external adat recorder. The audio data is divided into data blocks of 8 tracks (shown in black in the diagram below) and transferred. To save data for all Real and Additional tracks (totally 24 tracks), 3 units of eight-track data are transferred. Therefore, it will take about 3 times as much as the recorded time of a program (from ABS O to REC END) to save all the data recorded on the program. When loading song data from an adat recorder to the VF160EX, data is transferred with eight-track data blocks, the same as saving data. (See also <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF or adat digital signal> on the next page.) & 19 & 20 &218722 & 23824 [Program 1 (P01) | Program 2 (PO2) Program 99 (P 99) Using a CD-RW/CD-R disc (you can save/load data for each program individually.): When using a CD-RW/CD-R disc, all audio data including both the Real and Additional tracks (shown in black in the agram below) is transferred simultaneously. No pilot tone or beep sound is recorded when saving data to a CD- RW/CD-R disc. Therefore, you can save or load a program much faster than using an S/PDIF or adat signal. If song data to be saved requires more space than the available disc space, you can save the data to more than one s s ve/load operation using a WAV file, you can specify a track or tracks to be saved or loaded, as well as all tracks. Using the save function to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, you can also make an original audio CD. Tk18&2 LES 10S Programl1(POl) | Program2(P02) | Program 99 (P99)

EEE VFiSOE< FOStEX <tems that can be saved or loaded as song data> Memory data: Data for CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT. Locate data (for Locate No. 00 through 99, only available with save/load using CD-RW/CD-R) Time base: ABS, MTC or BAR/BEAT/CLK “SETUP mode: Bar/beat setting, tempo setting, metronome on/off, preroll time, MIDI synchronization output signal setting, MTC offset time, MTC offset mode, REC protect setting, slave mode on/off, slave type setting <tems that cannot be saved or loaded as song data> On/off settings for Auto play mode and Auto return mode Vari pitch on/off and pitch data SETUP mode: DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT settings, bar/beat resolution on/off and device ID Save/load of song data using the S/P DIF adat digital s <Notes for DAT and adat machines to be used> The VF160EX song data only can be saved to or loaded from a digital machine that can record 16 bit, 44.1 kHz linear digital data with S/PDIF or adat format (such as DAT and adat machines). Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF or adat digital signal> When saving all data including both real and (l Additional track data using the S/PDIF or adat Additional j digital signal, note the following. vacks {

Only the data recorded within the time duration between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved. Therefore, if the recorded time of Additional tracks is longer than the Real tracks, only the Real tracks Additional track data within the time duration { between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved. Save DAT or adat In the example shown on the right, the Additional tracks have data from "OOm 00" to "10m 00s", while the Real tracks have data from "OOm 00s" to "07m 00s". À &——— + Seven minutes If you are going to save all tracks, the Additional À À REC END (10m 00s) of track data from "OOm 00s" to "07m 00s" will be additional track saved but the rest will not be saved. REC END (07m 00s) of real track

FosteX VFISOS< Saving data using the S/P DIF or adat digital signal You can save data using the S/PDIF or adat digital signal via the [DIGITAL/DATA OUT] jack. [+Use an external device that supports 44.1 KHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF160EX)

Connecting to an external device

Saving data Connect the DIGITAL/DATA OUT jack to the digital input jack of the external digital device (DAT or adat etc.). <Note> The DIGITAL/DATA OUT jack accommodates either the S/PDIF (optical) or adat digital signal selected. Though the S/PDIF (optical) and adat digital signal use the same connector shape, the signal formats are different.

oo LUOOOD adat or DAT + When using the S/PDIF signal, if your DAT only provide the coaxial (RCA) digital input jack and does not provide the optical jack, use the optional COP- 1/96kHz (optical/coaxial converter). +_ Do not connect digital signals for both directions between the VFL60EX and the external device (ie. the digital output of the VF160EX to the digital input of the external device and the digital output of the external device to the digital input of the VF160EX), which may form a digital loop and cause feedback. U ) Setting the external device

1. Set the sampling frequency to 44.1 kHz (the same as

2. Setthe input source to "digital input" to accept the

signal from the VF160E X. Some machine also needs to select the clock reference to "external" when setting the input source to "digital input", See the operation manual of the machine for the detailed information. <Note> If you cannot hear the input signal or you hear digital noise when monitoring the source signal of the external digital device, check the connections, cables and settings of both the VF160EX and the external device. F à *See the operation manual of the external device for the detailed information. You can save data via the "Save PGM" menu in the SETUP mode. <Details about "Save PGM" menu> Output signal options: OPT (adat or S/PDIF) IDE (CD-1A/EX) «Program options: POI to P99 (an individual Program) ‘Track options:

• When using S/PDIF or adat: Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24 or Tracks 17-24.
• When u: a CD-RW/CD-R disk: All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks individually when saving by the WAV file format).

1. Press the [SE TUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu.

2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select "Save PGM" and press the

[ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the device to which the data is saved. "IDE" flashes. Select Menu FH

EE in 1 +2 REU FFC: + Hit YES or NO Ken

3. Use the [REWIND] key to select "OPT" and press the

[ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting "SPDIF" or "adat", in which "SPDIF" flashes. FEUDE + or HO Key

Use the [RE WIND] or [F FWD] key to select "SPDIF" (or "adat") and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the program to be saved. The program number currently selected flashes, while the data size of the program is shown. While à program number is flashing, you can select the desired program to be saved. SETUR Save PGM SPOIF UP<O0H JG Hit _YES or HO Ees Use the [J 0G] dial to select the program to be saved and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the "Save Length" screen. Initially, the recorded time length of the selected program (ABS 0 to REC END) is shown as the time length of data saving. Normally you do not need to edit the length but you may edit it to the desired value if needed. PURE

+: REU _Hit_YES or HO FEUD: + kes For example, if the actual recorded time is 9 min. 00 sec., you can make the length of the data to be saved shorter or longer than 9 min. 00 sec., as long as the length does not exceed 59 min.59 sec. The initially displayed value here is the length of the Real track, therefore, as noted earlier, you may edit the value to match the length of the Additional track if it is longer.

[To editthe save length Press the [REWIND] or [F FWD] key to move the flashing field between "minutes" and "seconds". Use the [ 06] dial to set the value for the flashing field. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting tra saved. FEUD: +

#5 REU Hit_YES _or HO Select tracks to be saved. Press the [REWIND] or [F FWD] key to move the flashing field between "From" and "To". Use the f 06] dial to set the track number for the flashing field. For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and

17. For the "To" field, you can select from 8, 16 and 24.

For example, if you select "From 1 to 24", data for all tracks (1 to 24) will be saved.

<Note> When you save tracks including Additional tracks, read <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF or adat digital signal> on page 107 before executing the save operation. After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key again. The display shows "Rec Start Recorder!" together with the program and tracks to be saved, and "Sure?" flashes. This means "are you sure to start saving data to recorder?".

Fec Start Recorder! Pl tkt ] From #x To #4 (Eure? ] Hit TES or NO K After checking any preparations on the external digital recorder are made, start it recording. It may be a good idea to put a START-ID (for DAT) or set a locate memory at the starting position so that you can easily find the position when you load the data later.

10. Press the [ENTER/YES] key right after the external

machine starts recording. The display shows something like the one below. After a few seconds, the unit starts saving the data and "Wait time" starts counting down. Save PGM SPOIF Dats Savinal Save Track kr Wait Time- HE NERS For the first several seconds, the VF160EX transmits the pilot signal that will a reference for locating the tape position during the load operation, and the actual data saving starts from the position at which "Waïttime" starts counting down. Using the "S/PDIF" signal, data is saved in 2-track unit. Using the "a gnal, data is saved in 8-track unit. When the data saving is completed, "Completed!" appears on the screen and the VF160EX stops. <Note> If you interrupts saving before completing, the saved data is invalid. 1l. Stop the external recorder machine.

12. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly

until exiting the Setup mode. To cancel each operation or to return to the previous screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the IEXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the key returns to the previous screen and finally exits the Setup mode.

| “Use an external device that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF160EX).

Connecting to an external device Loading data Connect the [DIGITAL/DATA IN] jack to the digital output jack of the external digital device. You can load data via the "Load PGM" menu in the SETUP mode. <Notes> + The DIGITAL/DATA OUT jack accommodates either the S/PDIF (optical) or adat digital signal selected. Though the S/PDIF (optical) and adat digital signal use the same connector shape, the signal formats are different. +_ Do not do anything, such as unplug the optical cable, that interrupts the digital signal until the loading operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may generates a noise which damages an external device. O0000 OO000000000 7 moe OUOUUD |, adat or DAT + When using the S/PDIF signal, if your DAT only provide the coaxial (RCA) digital input jack and does not provide the optical jack, use the optional COP-1/ 96kHz (optical/coaxial converter). + Do not connect digital signals for both directions between the VF160EX and the external de (ie. the digital output of the VF160EX to the digital input of the external device and the digital output of the external device to the digital input of the VF160EX), which may form a digital loop and cause feedback. Setting the external device

1. Make preparations of the external device for outputting

2. Locate the beginning of the pilot signal for the song data.

the detailed information. La the operation manual of the external device for {<Details about "Load PGM" menu> «Input signal options: OPT (adat or S/PDIF) IDE (CD-1A/EX) «Program options: POI to P99 (an individual Program) Track options:

• When using S/PDIF or adat: Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Trac Tracks 9-24 or Tracks 17-24.
• When using a CD-RW/CD-R disk: AÏl tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks individually when loading à WAV file).

1. Press the [SE TUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu. s 1-24, Tracks 9-16,

2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select "Load PGM" and press the

IENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flashes. (Select Menu 7] Chain Flau List Chain Plas of i F1 ( i BlEs or _HÜ Ken

3. Use the [RE WIND] key to select "OPT" and press the

IENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting "SPDIF" or “adat", in which "SPDIF" flashes. 2REU FFUD: + Ait TES or HO Ken (If you load data using the adat digital signal, select | ladat”. If you load data using the S/PDIF digital signal, select "SPDIF".

Use the [RE WIND] or [F FWD] key to select "SPDIF" (or "adat") and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting a load destination program to which data is loaded. A program number currently selected flashes, followed by its program name. The data size of the current program is also shown. When a program number is flashing, you can select the desired load destination program. Load F6 SPOIE Dsstn PGM Select L'#aai 1 HakktiE

Hit YES or HO Ke You can select a load destination program from existing programs on the current drive as well as "New PGM". When selecting "New PGM", a new program is created. (+ If you load data to a program in which data is already recorded, the newly loaded data overwrites the current data track by track. Consequently, on each overwritten track, the loaded data becomes valid while the current data is erased.

Use the [J 0G] dial to select the program to which data is loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to be loaded. ÉES FRE DOUN JüG FEHD: + “He MES or HO ke Select tracks to be loaded. Press the [REWIND] or [F FWD] key to move the flashing field between "From" and "To". Use the f 06] dial to set the track number for the flashing field. For the "From field, you can select from 1, 9 and

17. For the "To" field, you can select from 8, 16 and 24.

For example, if you select "From 1 to 24", data for all tracks (1 to 24) will be loaded. After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key again. The display shows something like the one below. A load destination program (existing or new program) to which the data is loaded and tracks to be loaded are shown, while "Sure?" flash oad PGM SPOIE Déstn PGn Select PEL BR ] From 44% To #4 Sure? Hit YES or HO Ke L-Flashing

<Note> In the above step, if the VF1GOEX does not lock to the digital signal from the external digital device, the following warning message appears on the display. This indicates that the VF160EX does not receive a correct digital signal (S/PDIF or adat signal). So check the cable connection and the digital output settings of the external digital device.

Load PEN SPDIE aka pi ne Ltttok Disital In Unlock É l

8. When the VF160EX is locking to the digital input signal,

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows "Play Start Player!" Load FGM SPOIF Plas Start Plauer!

9. Start playback of the player.

After reading the pilot signal recorded when saving the data, the data starts loading automatically. When starts loading, the display shows something like the one below, in which "Wait time" starts counting down.

Laad PGM SPOIF Data Loadirma! Load Track tk “Wait Time- Æbetekmeetks Using the "S/PDIF" signal, data is loaded in 2-track unit. While loading, the indicators on [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for channels 1 and 2 flash, while the input levels are displayed by level meters 1 and 2. Using the "adat” signal, data is loaded in 8-track unit. While loading, the indicators on [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for channels 1 through 8 flash, while the input levels are displayed by level meters 1 and 8. When the data loading is completed, "Complete!" appears on the screen. Note> If you quit loading before completing, the loaded data is invalid.

10. Stop the external DAT (or adat) machine.

1l. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode. To cancel each operation or to return to the previous screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the IEXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the key returns to the previous screen and finally exits the Setup mode.

FosteX VFISOS< EN Save/Load using CD-RW/CD-R By using the built-in CD-R/RW drive (Model CD-1A/EX), you can save/load data in the FDMS-3 format or WAV file format, as well as create or load an audio CD (CD-DA). <Care and handling of CD-RW/CD-R discs> With a CD-R/RW drive, you can use not only CD-RW discs but also CD-R discs. Note that CD-R discs has some restrictions as shown below. r = F — à 7H) ZE CreWritable |] You can save (record) data to a disc as many times re- You can save (record) data to a disc only once quired. Note that when saving new data, itis recorded You cannot save data to a recorded disc. You can, of after the previously recorded data is erased. In other course, load data as many times as required. words, every time you save new data, all disc data is rewritten. (See “Saving data” described later.) U ) k J <Note> A CD-RW/CD-R disc on which VF160EX data is recorded can only be played by Fostex machines. Do not play it by non-Fostex devices. The drive or system used may be damaged. However, a CD-R disc with audio CD format created by the Fostex machine can be played by general machines such as audio CD players. (If an audio CD is made using a CD-RW disc, it can be played back only by a player that supports CD-RW playback. You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD player that does not support CD-RW playback.) <About data writing and reading speeds for data save/load> The writing and reading speeds for data save and load of the VF160EX are automatically set as below. *Writing speed: according to a CD-R/RW drive used, however the maximum speed is 8 times. «Reading speed: according to a CD-R/RW drive used. The writing speed depends on a CD-R/RW drive but it is limited to 8 times. For save/load of the VF160EX data, use discs that can be written at 4 times or higher speed. Do not use discs that only can be written at real-time or twice speed. <Notes on handling of discs> + When handling a disc, be careful not to dirty or + Do not stick any paper, etc. on the label side. scratch the surface of the disc. Also do not scratch the label side, which may We recommend that you hold the disc with your cause problems during playback or recording. finger on the disc edge and center hole. Use only a felt pen or equivalent for writing any memo on the label side. Using a ball-point pen, pencil, etc. that has a hard tip may damage a disc. + Never use a warped or chipped disc, which may damage the CD-R/RW drive.

e If there is a dust, dirt or fingerprints on the disc, which may cause error in playback or recording, wipe the disc with a soft, dry cloth or alcohol from the center out. Never wipe from the outside to center. Notes on care ofdisc> ° Do not use a cleaner for analog discs or antistatic ° Do not expose any disc to direct sunlight, or leave - Read the attached manual packed with the disc spray, as well as volatile solvents such as benzine, which may damage the disc surface. it in hot, moist or cold places. before using it. Opening/closing the tray To open the tray, press the eject switch lightly. Pressing the switch will open the tray slightly. Then pull out the tray gently by hand to fully open it. Eject switch lens — } Pull outthe tray to fully open it. <Caution!> Do not touch the lens when pulling out the tray, do- ing so may damage it and may cause a malfunction. To close the tray, push the tray inside by hand until locked. Push untilitis locked. Placing/removing a disc The following are some notes on placing and/or re- moving a disc. <MPORTANT!> When placing a disc on the tray, support the tray from the bottom by your hand. If you push the disc to fit into the pivot on the tray without supporting the tray, the tray/drive may be damaged or broken. Also note that the disc must be pushed until it clicks so that it is locked into the pivot securely. Closing the tray without locking the disc may damage the disc. Note for removing a disc from the tray> When removing a disc from the tray, also support the tray from the bottom by your hand. Also be careful not to unlock the disc from the pivot forcibly, which may damage the tray. Place the disc with the label side up. When placing the di :, support the tray from the bottom by your hand as shown in the illustration below, and push the disc gently until it clicks so that the disc is locked into the pivot. Push the disc until it clicks so thatthe disc is locked into the pivot. / bottom by your hand. <Caution!>

The underside of the tray may extremely heat up. Take care when supporting the underside of the tray. <Caution!> Do not touch the lens when placing a disc, doing so may damaged may cause a malfunction.

FosteX VFISOS< EN Save/load of Song Data Using a CD-R/RW drive When saving/loading data using the CD-R/RW drive, program data is saved/loaded as shown be- low. *Save You can only a single selected program data to a disc regardless of the program data amount. You cannot save more than one program data even if there are enough disc space. However, you can save a program data to more than one disc if the data amount is larger than a disc space. You can save almost all necessary information such as song data of all tracks (real and additional tracks) and mixer scene data. Program 1 (PO1) | Program2(P02) |. Program 99 (PO1) Current drive oftthe VF 160E X *Load The data loading using a CD-R/RW drive is taken place after a “new program” is created in the current drive (the load destination). You cannot overwrite an existing program with the loaded data. The newly created program is numbered the next number to the highest existing program number. TK18&28&384858&6 87 & 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13 & 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 & 19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24 y Load [Program 1 (P01) |] Program 2 (P02) Current drive of the VF160EX *Creating an audio CD You can make an audio CD by recording sound data of tracks 1 and 2 between the “CLIPBOARD IN point” and “CLIPBOARD OUT point” to a CD-RW/CD-R disc. «Loading an audio CD data You can load a material on a (commercial or created) audio CD to a program of the VF1GOEX. Audio data is loaded to a “new program” automatically created by the unit, which is the same way as backup data loading. The unit never overwrites the existing program.

EEE VIS OE< FOStEX Saving data using a CD-R/RW drive (Backup) The following description is assumed that a non-recorded CD-R/RW disc is used. <Note> Do not carry out any VF160EX key operation until the access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed. L Afterturning on the VF160EX, insert a disc to the CD-R/ RW drive.

Press the [SE TUP]key oftheVF160E X to enter the setup mode. The display shows the screen for selecting the setup menu.

Use the [J 0G] dial to select (highlight) “Save PGM” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting a save device, where “IDE” is flashing, Saue Dauices Selsct OPT Flashing €: REU FFUD: + Hit VES or HO Ko

4. While “IDE” flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key to display the CD-R/RW drive name, and then changes to the save mode select screen where "Bkup" (Backup) flashes. To save (backup) song data, select “BkUp”. To make an audio CD, select “CD-DA” or “Setup”. This procedure describes how to save song data, so we select “BkUp” he: See “making an a CD” described later for details about how to make an audio CD.

CO-DA Setur :REM FEUDE + Hit YVES or MO Ken Cal While “BkUp” flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting a program to be saved (the program number of the selected program flashes).

Flashing— HE AIMER ecorded UP-DOUH JOG space Hit YES or HO Ke By rotating the J 06] dial, you can select a desired pro- gram number/title from among available programs in the VFL60EX current drive. The recorded space of the selected program is also shown. If you select a program which requires more than one disc for saving, the display shows the required number of dises (see the screen example below). ce PGM Select sheet Number of discs— i5k= 139 ME

6. After selecting a program, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen as below.

UP-OOUH JOG Sure Hit TES or NO Ken In the example above, the selected program data will be saved to a CD-RW/CD-R di th the backup number «B01”. The program title is copied to the backup title (you can not edit it). By rotating the [J 0G]dial when the above screen is shown, you can also select “Eject”, bes BO1”. If you select “Eject” and then press the [ENTER/YES] key, the disc will be ejected. While “BO1”is shown, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The VF160EX starts the save operation. The recorded space shown on the display is counted down while the save operation progre: It will take some time for saving all data. The following display example shows that the data of the selected program number is being saved to the backup number “B01”. Data, Sauimal Pak BE

When completing the save operation, “Save Complete!” appears on the display (as shown below) and the VF160EX stops access to the drive, while the disc in the CD-R/RW drive is automatically ejected.

Save Completedl! —EKIT- Hit YES or NO Keu When saving data to more than one disc, the first disc will be ejected when it is full (ie. there is no more re- cording space on the disc), while “Insert Disk!” appears on the screen. After inserting the second disc, the VF160EX automatically resumes the save operation. After completing the save operation, the final disc is ejected and the above screen appears. (See <Note> be- low). Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit the Setup mode. <Note for saving data to more than one disc> If you save data to more than one disc, we recom- mend to put a number on each disc in the saving order (such as DISC-1, DISC-2, etc.) so that you will easily know che order for inserting discs when load- ing data. <Note> You cannot abort the save operation before com- pleted. Especially during the save operation to more than one disc, if you happen to press the [EXIT/NO] key while removing or inserting a disc, you have to redo the save operation from the beginning with the first disc. <About save error> If an error occurs for some reason during the save operation, the error message as below appears. IF it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The display returns to the previous screen before performing the save operation. Note that saved data before the error message ap- pears is all invalid. Save PGM IDE ÉRTEERTEEE TE] Save Hot Comrletedl Error, gecurred _ “I Hit “ES or NO Ke <Note> If the message above appears while saving data to a CD-R disc, you can no longer use the disc. <Hint1> In the description for saving data above, we use a non-recorded CD-RW/CD-R disc. If you use a recorded disc (including a disc on which computer data is recorded), also note the following. By performing step 5 in the save operation procedure shown above (“While “BkUp” is flashing, press the [EN- TER/YES] key”.) When a recorded disc is inserted, the dis- play shows a warning message, followed by the confir- mation screen (where “Sure?” flashes). With this screen, you can choose whether erasing the re- corded data or ejecting the di ÉÉRETETS #3 ME) Eject H JOG Surer Hi TES or HO feg Flashing Flashing -To erase the existing (recorded) data Press the [ENTER/YES] key while both “RASE” and “Sure?” are flashing. The display shows the screen be- low and the VF1GOEX starts erasing the disc. As the erase process progresses, the number of flashing increases from left to right. ÉÉTEREEEET #4 ME Erssins CDRW Houl Eiect *OOUN JOG Surez AE Hit ES or NO Ke increases as the process progresses. Immediately after completing erasing the disc, the display shows the same screen (for selecting a pro- gram to be saved) which appears after step 5 is performed. Hereafter, perform the same procedure as described above. <Note> The erasure operation described above is the "quick erasure". The VF160EX only erases special areas (TOC, etc.) and does not erase data area. If you repeatedly encounter a read error after carrying out the erasure operation above, try to carry out "full erasure" de- scribed on the next page. To eject the disc Use the [J 06] dial to highlight “Eject” (flashing) and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The disc is ejected while the display shows “Insert Disk!”. By inserting a disc, you can start the save operation again from the beginning. <Hint2> If you try to save data to a recorded CD-R disc, the dis- play shows a warning message saying “NotWritable”, fol- lowed by a message saying “Insert Disk” as below. Insert Disk

EEE VIS OE< FOStEX Carrying out "full erasure" L While the recorder is stopped, press the [SE TUP] key.

To carry out "Full rase", select "Full", To carry out the "Quick erase" which is the same one as described on the previous page, select "Quick". If you select "Eject", the disc is ejected. Use the [J 0G] dial to highlight "Full" and press the IENTER/YES] key. The VF160EX starts erasing. When completing, "Completed!" is shown. 0 isc Frase +. BXL RE ] Giaick Eject Des POLE Ee Le Hit TES or MO Keu ns mu TUP K Erasins CORW Howl AREA —7——

{Disc Erase Lun Erase Completed! Hit YES<Continues Hit HOCExit) <Note> Ifthe VF160EX cannot carry out "Full e son, the display returns to show the sl ing the erase mode. In such a case, try to carry out the same operation as described above. "byany rea- en for select-

7. To “full erase" another disc, press the [ENTER/YES] key,

followed by the procedure described in <How to “full erase" another disc> below. To exit the erase mode, press the [EXIT/NO] key. <How to “full erase" another disc> Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key brings up the screen for selecting the erase mode shown above. Select "Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The disc already erased is ejected. Then set another disc to be erased. When setting the disc, the display automatically changes to the screen for selecting the erase mode. Select "Full" as step 6 above. The VF160EX starts full erasing.

FosteX VFISOS< EN Loading backup data from a CD-R/RW drive The following description is assumed that you have a CD-RW/CD-R disc which contains saved data. <Note> Do not carry out any VF160EX key operation until the access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed.

1. After turning on the VF160EX, insert the disc to the

CD-R/RW drive. <Note> If you load song data which is saved to more than one disc, set DISC-1 first. If you set the other disc and go on the following pro- cedure, the VF160EX automatically recognized that the disc order is not correct and the display shows “Wrong Disk”, followed by “lllegal No!” momentarily, and the disc is automatically ejected.

2. Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

Press where "Bkup" (Backup) flashes. To load saved data, select "BkUp". To load data from an audio CD, select "CD-DA". Let's select "Bkup" here and go on to the following procedure. See "loading from an audio CD" described later for details about how to use audio CD (CD-DA) discs. IDE flashing +: REU Hit VES or HO Ke FEUD: + Use the [J 0G] dial to select (highlight) “Load PGM” and the [ENTER/ES] key to display the CD-R/RW drive name, and then changes to the load mode select screen

The display shows the backup number and title, as well as recorded space. UP-OGuH JOG Hit _YES or HO Ees By rotating the J 06] dial, you can select a desired pro- gram number/title from among available programs in the VF160EX current drive. You can also select “Eject”. If you select “Eject” and press the [ENTER/YES] key, the disc is ejected When you load song data which is saved to more than one dise, the display also shows the disc number cur- rently set. The example below shows DISC-1 is set. Load PGO IDE Source PGM Select Eettk #t+iE flashing lighting Diski

Hit TES or HO Ken While the desired backup number/title is shown on the display, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for creating a new program on the current drive, to which data will be loaded (“New PGM” lights). tn PGM Select 5 Heu PG ë_ME UP-OGUH JOG Sure? Hit YVES or HO Ken As described earlier, when loading data from a CD-RW drive, the VF160EX creates a new program on the cur- rent drive, which is the load destination. Therefore, “New PGM” is shown on the right of the flashing program num- ber. The program number for the newly created desti- nation program is the next number to the highest exist- ing program number. For example, if there are 8 exist- ing programs (“PO1” through “PO8”) on the current drive, the newly created program is numbered “PO9”. <Note> If you rotate the [J 0G] dial while the above $ (“Desin PGM Select”) is shown, you can select an exist- ing program on the current drive as the destination. However, as mentioned earlier, when loading data using CD-RW you cannot actually load data to the ex- isting program by overwriting the program data. If you press the [ENTER/YES] key (see the next step) while selecting an existing program as the destina- tion, the display shows “Void!” and the VF1GOEX ig- nores the operation.

The VF160EX starts the load operation. The recorded space shown on the display is counted down while the load operation progresses. It will take some time for loading all data. The following display example shows that the data of the backup number “BO1” is being loaded to “PO8” which is newly created on the current drive. Data Losdina! Eb1 PAS #k ME <Display example for loading> <Note> If there is not enough available space for loading on the current drive, the display shows “Disk Full!” and the display returns to the previous screen. When completing the load operation, “Load Completed!” appears on the display (as shown below) and the VFI60EX ss to the drive, while the disc in the CD-R/RW utomatically ejected. pag EE RNENES Load Comeletedl! —ÉKIT- Hit YES or HO Ke When loading data from more than one disc, the first disc will be ejected immediately after all disc data has been loaded, while “insert Disk!” appears on the screen. After inserting the second disc, the VF160EX automati- cally resumes the load operation. Aftér completing loading all the discs, the above screen appears. <Note> You cannot abort the load operation before completed.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit the Setup mode. <About load error> If an error occur for some reason during the load operation, the error message as below appears. If it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The display returns to the previous screen before per- forming the load operation. Note that loaded data before the error message ap- pears is all invalid. Loan PEN IDE

Load Mot Comrleted! Error, Gccurred EXIT- Hit_YES_or_ HO Kes

FOSTeX VFISOS< EN Save/load of WAV files using a CD-RW/CD-R drive You can save or load a WAV file to or from a CD-RW/CD-R disc. Notes for saving a WAV file> You can save data for only one desired program to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, regardless of the recording size. Even if a disc has enough recording space, you cannot record data for more than one program to it. If data size for a program is larger than the size of a disc, it can be saved using more than one disc. <mportant notes for using a WAV file> About directory of a backup disc: +_ A WAV file saved is recorded in the root directory (in the first layer) on the backup disc. +_ A WAV file that can be loaded must be allocated in the root directory on the backup disc. A WAV file moved from the root directory to another area such as a folder cannot be recognized by the VF160EX, which may cause a malfunction. About file names of WAV file: + _A WAV file the VF160EX saves is recorded with a file name "**##/#£ WAV." *_A WAV file the VF160EX can load must have a file name "*####£ WAV." The first 6 characters "**#*! are the title that is shown in the "Title Edit’ screen in the Setup mode. These characters can be changed when saving using a WAV file or edited by a computer. The following 2 characters "#' indicate the track number (1 to 24) for the save/load using a WAV file. The last "WAV" is the file extension indicating that the file format is WAV. The VF160EX does not recognize other file names than above. See the following description for each operation about details. By using the specifications above, you can load only the desired tracks of a WAV file or load a track- swapped WAV file.

EN ViSOEx FOStEX Saving a WAV file The following description is assumed that an unused CD-RW/CD-R disc is set to the CD-R/RW drive. L Press the [SETUP]key to enterthe Setup mode. The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu.

2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select "Save PGM" and press the

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the save mode, where "BkUp" flashes. D-0A Setur FEUD: + ir FES or HO Ke

While "BkUp" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display Shows the screen for selecting the backup mode (FDMS3 or WAV), where "WAV" flashes.

SHÈT “ES or ra FE Cal While "WAV" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting On or Off of the Clipboard Export function, where "Off" flashes. You can switches between On and Off by using the J 06] dial (or REWIND] key/[F FWD] key).

FEUDE + Hit YES or MO Ken If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END" (in most cases), you do not have to change the setting here.

<About the Clipboard Export function> The "Clipboard Export function" allows you to save the desired range of data between the Clipboard In and Out points which are set when executing the Copy-paste or Move-paste function. Therefore, if you want to save only the specific range of data, you have to register the Clipboard In and Out points before the save operation. See "Locate Function" in "Chapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback" for details about how to set the Clip- board In and Out points <Note> If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END", make sure to set the "Clipboard Export function" to "Off.

6. While "Off' is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a program to be saved. The program number currently selected flashes, while the data size of the program is shown. IDE Source PGM Select

Hit MES or NO Key Use the [J 0G] dial to select a program to be saved and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting a track to be saved. Initially, "AI Track" flash Flashing “bécooun 208 ” Hit YES or No Keu By rotating the [ 06] dial (or press the [F FWD] key), you can select "From *To *" (where the left field flashes initially) instead of "All Track". If you save data for all tracks (1 through 24), select "All Track”. If you save data for any specific track (s), select "From *To # and specify the desired track numbers. Flashing — FFI DÉSDQUN 106 Hit TES or HO Key

FOSTeX VFISOS< EN <To specify the desired tracks to "From *To **"> By rotating the [J 0G] dial while the left ("From") field is flashing, you can select the track number from 01 through 24. The number in the right ("To") field automatically follows the number in the left field (i.e. numbers in the left and right fields are ah S the same.) Therefore, if you want to save a single track, you just have to set the right ("From") field and do not have to set the right ("To") field. For example, "From 02To 02" will save only track 2. To specify tracks 5 through 12: + Enter "05" to the left field while the left field is flashing. + Press the [F FWD] key to make the right field flashing. + Enter "12", (Note that the number for the right field must be equal to or larger than the left field.) Fin. ally, the screen shows "From 05 To 12" to save

8. After selecting the track(s), press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a WAV file on You can select “Eject" by rotating the [ 06] dial. To remove the disc, select "Eject" and press the [ENTER/ YES] key. Save UAU IDE in WAY Select Flashing — ES Heu File UP-OOUH JOG _ Sure? Hit YES or NO Kes "is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for editing the WAV file. IDE Title Edit #1REU UP-DOUN JOG Hit YES or NO Kes By rotating the 06] dial, you can set the desired numeric, symbolic or alphabetical character to the flashing point. You can move the flashing point by using the [F FWD] key or IREWIND] key. See the following table for the available characters. Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z) Numerals (0 to 9) Symbols (!#$% &'()@ *_-) <Note> You can use up to 6 characters for à file name. Some characters entered are converted as shown be- se alphabetical characters (A to Z): not converted. + Lower-case alphabetical characters (a to z): converted to the corresponding upper-case. + Numerals (!# $%&'()@A : not converted. + Other symbols: converted to "

10. After entering the file name, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The save operation is executed and the display shows something like the one as below. As the file save goes on, the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down. Save UAU IDE | Data Savins! Pt 5 AU tie iately after the data save to each dis automatically ejected, and "Insert Di en, prompting you to insert the next disc. Inserting the next disc resumes the save operation. After the save operation is completed, "Save Completed!" appears on the screen. Sauve PGM Save Comrleted! . <EXIT- Hit YES or NO Ées

1. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP]key) repeatedly until

exiting the Setup mode. Note> When using a CD-RW or CD-R disc on which program data is recorded, pressing the [ENTER/ES] key while "BkUp" is flashing brings up the warning message, fol- lowed by the screen for erasing the existing file, as shown below. Save PO IDE BB CARMEN ] L* ME H J0Ë* Er Es NES où HO Ken To erase the existing file, select “ERASE" and press the IENTER/YES] key. If you do not want to erase the file, select "Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The disc is ejected and you can replace the disc with another one. Use the [J 06] dial (or the [REWINDJ/[F FWD] keys) to select "ERASE" or "Eject”. <Note> The erasure operation described above is the “quick erasure". The VF160EX only erases areas (TOC, etc.) and does not read erro: r- rying out the erasure operation above, try 10 carry out "full erasure" described on page 117.

VAFISOE FOSteX <AboutWAV files saved> + WAV file structure. A WAV file on the CD-RW/CD-R disc has 24 files (one file per track) in the root directory of the disc. The file names are "**##Q01. WAV" through "*###24.WAV" where "#k##' shows the file name specified in step 8 and each number (O1 - 24) shows the corresponding track number. N + WAV file structure which is saved over more than one disc. A WAV file is saved in order of track number (from tracks 1 to 24). During the

+ WAV file size When dat: ve operation over more than one CD-RW/CD-R disc, the VF160EX always calculat utomatically. If the VF160EX knows that the available space gets smaller than the data size of the next track, it will change the disc when the data save of the current track is completed. ing data by the WAV file format to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, the file s e in the current drive, depending on the recorded data condition such as the start time, end time, the data amount, etc. on each track. For example, if a track is recorded from ABS: O (min.) to ABS: 1 (min.) and ABS: 10 (min.) to ABS: 11 (min.), the file on the current drive has a length of 2 minutes, while the WAV file has a length of 11 minutes. he available space of the ize may sometimes increase compared with the Loading a WAV file The following description is assumed that a CD-RW/CD-R disc which contains saved data is set to the CD-R/RW drive.

Press the [SE TUP] key to enter the Setup mode. The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu. Use the [J 0G] dial to select "Load PGM" and press the IENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flas Re Mer — lÉave PEN Chain Plas List Chain Plas __ Off ax Pürl Lun Load Device Select OPT #1 REU FEUD: + Hit YES or HO Kes While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the drive name, followed by the screen for selecting the WAV file to be loaded, showing the WAV file name and size.

4. Usethe [J 0G]dial to selectthe desired WAV file to be

Load WAU IDE Source WAU Select Flashing— He ME Flashing Sites 5] ak +1 REU

LUP-DOUH JOG UP“DOUH JOG

LHit VÉS or HO Kes Hit ŸÉS or NO Ken loaded. If more than one WAV file with different file names (the first 6 characters) is saved, you can see each file name (by the first 6 characters) in order when rotating the [ 0G] dial. You can also select "Eject" to remove the CD-RW/CD-R disc. <Note> The VF160EX cannot recognize any other file names but “este WAV" and cannot load such € A WAV file with an unique name (the first 6 characters) is recognized as an independent backup file and can be selected. After selecting the desired WAV file, press the IENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting a track to be loaded. "All" flashes initially. Load WAU IDE gd Track Select or Indis Track

+: RÈL Di + UP-DOuH JüG Hit ES or HO Kes Besides "AIl", you can select any one of tracks (01 through

24) by rotating the J 06] dial.

FOSTeX VFISOS< EN 6. After selecting the desired track(s), press the [ENTER/YES] 8. Press the [EXIT/NO]key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly until key. exiting the Setup mode. The display shows the screen for selecting the load destination program to which a WAV file is loaded. To go back to the previous step or about the operation, you You can select the program by using the [ 0G] dial. can also use the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP]key. in PGM Select ŒSSTE

LP-OOUH JOG Sure? Hit VES or HO Kes When the screen shows ze", the selected program will be deleted and replaced with the WAV file loaded. When the screen shows “Title” and "New PGM", the WAV file loaded will create a new program. <Note> Ifthe current drive does not have enough available space for loading the WAV file, the size indication on the screen shows a negative value ("##"). In such a case, select a program that can be replaced with the WAV file loaded without causing the disc space shortage, or delete unnecessary programs by the "delete PGM" menu in the Setup mode.

After selecting the load destination program, press the IENTER/YES] key. When selecting a new program as the load destination (by selecting an option showing "Tite" and "New PGM"), the load operation immediately starts. When selecting an existing program as the load destination (by selecting an option showing "Title" and "Size"), "Overwrite?" and "Sure?" appear. Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key will start the load operation. During the load operation, the screen shows something like the one as below. As the data load goes on, the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down. Load WAU IDE Dats Loadins! WAUSS Pak

Load Comrleted! =EXIT- Hit YES or NO Ées When the load operation is completed, "Load Completed!" appears on the screen. Note> The title of the program to which the WAV file is loaded is replaced with the WAV file name loaded (the first 6 characters).

EEE VF ISO FOSteX Making an audio CD This section describes how to make an audio CD (CD-DA) using a CD-RW/CD-R disc from mixed-down materials created by the internal mixdown mode. See details for the internal mixdown mode on page 79. The “Save PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is used for saving song data, is also used for making an audio CD. CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point

[ mixed-down song data CLIPBOARD I point CLIPBORRD OUT point A850 ABS ON 205 00F ABS 08H 00S 00 mixed-down song data <Figure-1> When making an audio CD using the VF1GOEX, mixed- down materials on the current drive are recorded to a CD-RW/CD-R disc (by the CD-DA format). Only data between the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points of the mixed-down program is recorded to a CD-RW/CD-R disc. You can record more than one material to a disc successively. <Note> Ifan audio CD is made using a CD-RW disc, it can be played back only by a player that supports CD-RW playback. You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD player that does not support CD-RW playback. In the following operations, we assume that there are one or more programs which are mixed down by the internal mixdown mode on the current drive. <Note> Key operations of the VF160EX should be done after com- pleting access to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

1. After turning on the power of the VF160EX, load a

non-recorded disc to the CD-R/RW drive.

2. Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

3. Use the [J 0G] dial to select (highlight) the “Save PGM”

menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display shows the screen for selecting the device to which the data is saved. “IDE” flashes.

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, the display shows the CD-R/RW drive name, and then changes to the save mode select screen where "Bkup" (Backup) flashes.

To carry out making an audio CD, select “CD-DA”. If you need to change the copy protection setting (the default setting is “OFF”) and event enable setting (the default setting is "ON"), select “Setup” (for setting writ- ing conditions). If you make an audio CD without chang- ing the copy protection setting, skip steps 5 and 6 below and go to step 7. IDE Select CD-DA Setur FEUD: + or HO Kes Use the [J 0G] dial to select “Setup” and press the IENTER/YES] key. The display shows the “CD-R/RW Setup” screen, on which you can select the copy protection setting and event enable setting. isc Érase EventEnable OH Feserued Reserved Copy protection setting You can restrict the disc copy (duplication) ca- pability of an audio CD you are going to make. où | A disc you made can be copied w other digital device once À disc you made can be copied to other digital OFF h device as many times as required (default)

Event Enable setting This setting allows you to select whether enabling (ON) or disabling (OFF) the events stored between the clip- board in and clipboard out points when burning a material to an audio CD. See page 128 for details. Enables events between the clipboard in and out points. When making an audio CD, a mastered ma- ON |éerial is divided into tracks separated by the events (defaut. Disables events between the clipboard in and out OFF | points. When making an audio CD, à mastered ma- trial is not divided into tracks (ie. a material is burned as a single track). To change the setting, press the [ENTER/YES] key when the “CD-R/RW Setup” screen is shown. The current set- ting starts flashing, showing it can be edited. While flashing, use the [J 0G] dial to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press the [ENTER/YES] key to confirm. After setting the copy protection and event enable, press the [EXIT/NO] key. The display returns to the screen for selecting the save mode, in which “CD-DA” now flashes. While “CD-DA”is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key. After showing “PleaseWait!”, the display shows the screen for selecting the program(s) to be record. In the screen, a number such as “01” or “02” shows the track number, while “NON” shows that no program is assigned to the track. IDE Please Wait! TUF R22 (el £ Fectres 61 HOM de MON Press the [ENTER/YES] key again. The highest program number available on the current drive starts flashing and its program title and the recording time are also shown. At the top of the program table, the total time of the program is shown.

9. Usethe[] OG]dial to selecta desired program and press

the [ENTER/YES] key. The selected program is set to the first track. (Sel £ Fecties _} CA Sel 5 pattes Flashing—|

+ To record a single song to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, select a program and press the [ENTER/YES] key, and then go to step 10. +_ To record more than one song to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, repeat the procedure for selecting a program described above (ie. use the [J 06] dial to select a program and press the [ENTER/YES] key) until selecting all desired programs, and then go to step

<Note> If the program time shows “00: 00” when selecting a pro- gram as the screen example below, the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points are not correctly set. In other words, in the following conditions, the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points are not regarded as being correctly set. CLIPBOARD IN point = CLIPBOARD OUT point CLIPBOARD IN point >CLIPBOARD OUT point If you press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting such a program, the warning message as below appears on the display and you cannot select the program. “Void In!”,“Void Out!”, or “Void Data!” Itis possible to select à program that is not mixed down if it holds the correct “IN” and “OUT” points. However, if you record such a program to a CD-RW/ CD-R disc with the audio CD format, only track 1 and 2 can be recorded. So, make sure that you select programs properly when making an audio CD.

EEE VF ISO FOSteX Notes for selecting more than one program> When recording more than one program to a CD- RW/CD-R disc, do not skip any track when assigning programs to tracks. If you skip any track, you cannot record data to the subsequent tracks. In the following example, track 03 is skipped when assigning programs. So only tracks 01 and 02 will be recorded. Tracks 03 and subsequent tracks can not be recorded. Note> When making an audio CD, if you select a program hich consumes more disc space than the recordable space of a CD-RW/CD-R disc, “Disk Full!” appears on the display and you cannot select the program.

10. After specifying the program(s), press the [ENTER/YES]

key while holding down the [RECORD] key. The VF160EX starts recording to the disc, while the display shows the following screen.

Save PGM IDE Data Savinal Pat B6 1 When the recording ends, “Save Complete!” appears on the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected from the CD-R/RW drive. 11.When completed, press the [E XIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to quit the Setup mode. <Hint> When a CD-RW disc on which any data is recorded is set, if you perform step 7 above (i.e. pressing the [ENTER/ YES]key when “CD-DA” is flashing), “Not Empty!” appears on the display, followed by the screen for selecting whether erasing recorded data or ejecting the disc. Save PGM _IDE + BG sent PE et Ë Édres Hit “En Es Siü Kes a ME .1f you erase recorded data: Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “ERASE” and “Sure?” are flashing. After the key press, the display changes as follows and the unit starts erasing the data. As the e ing process is going on, the number of flashing “*” in- creases.

Save PO IDE Erasins CORW Howl athee The number of fiashing “*"increases. When erasing is completed, the display shows the same screen which appears when pressing the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting “CD-DA” on step 7 above. So follow the same procedure from step 8 on page 126. <Note> The erasure operation described above is the "quick erasure". The VF160EX only erases special areas (TOC, etc.) and does not read error after carrying out the erasure operation above, try to carry out "full era- sure" described on page 117. If you eject the disc: Use the J 06] dial to make “Eject” flashing and then he IENTER/YES] key. is ejected, while “Insert Disk!” appears on the screen. When inserting a blank disc, you can go on the next step (see the procedure described above).

Fostex VFISOS EN Details of Event Enable setting> The Event Enable setting selects enabling or disabling events registered between the Clipboard In and Out points of a material which is internally mastered for creating an audio CD. Normally, when mastering a song using the internal If you record a song which has events (as above) to a mixdown function, the Clipboard In and Out points CD-R/RW disc while "Event Enable" is set to "ON", are automatically set (see the figure below). The Clip- the song is divided into tracks by events (see the fig- board In point acts as "event" at the beginning of the ure below). song. By default, the "Event Enable" is set to "ON" (enabled). Therefore, when recording to a CD-R/RW Therefore, when creating an audio CD from a mas- disc, the VF160EX recognizes the material between tered song which has any event(s), make sure that the Clipboard In and Out points as a song (track). "Event Enable" is set to "OFF", in order to ignore the Cipsoard in ain Cinsoard Out point event(s) except the Clipboard In point (EVT 00) and prevent the song from being divided into tracks.

[ mastered song : However, if a mastered song has any event(s) (be- A | Hi 5 ; n sides the Clipboard In point), set "Event Enable" to "OFF". Note that the Clipboard In point is always rec- J ognized as "EVT 00" regardless of the "Event Enable" setting. The figure below shows the example of a mas- Tew1(c001) WE tered song which has events. ‘Track 2 (CDO2) B Track 3 (CD03) c cibasanpo — evrar ee ea Cotes oupan ' ! ' Track 4 (DA) D mastred song <'Event Enable" should also be set to "OFF" in such a case!> Let's assume that there are two programs; program 1 and program 2. The material in program 1 has events, while the material in program 2 does not (as shown in figure below). If you make an audio CD from these two materials, burn a disc with "Event Enable" set to "OFF". In result, you can make an audio CD containing two tracks (ignoring events on program 1). If you burn a disc with "Event Enable" set to "ON", program 1 is divided into four tracks. In result, a CD contain- ing five tracks (four from program 1 and one from program 2) is made. Cesd mpeg ue us Capoaroupant Cimagin oo ro nu ane os out pan t 1 Li Ÿ t Program | H Ï Progrem 1 DS B { € D Chou paie Cor out Coin pant Cara oupou Program 2 Program? | Track 1 (CDO1) Program 1 Track 1 (CDOL) A ‘Track 2 (CDO2) Program 2 Track 2 (CD02) 8 Track 3 (CD03) E Track (CDO4) D TrackS (CD05) Program 2 <"Event Enable" should be set to "ON" in such a case!> When loading more than one track from an audio CD you made to the VF160EX hard disk, all the tracks are loaded onto a single program (see "Loading from an audio CD" on the next page for details), in which a event is automatically set to the beginning of each track. — TT) | 7 DA FN Re : _— When making an audio CD from a program which has been loaded from an audio CD and contains more than one track, set "Event Enable" to "ON". This allows making a CD which contains the same number of tracks as the number of tracks loaded from an audio CD.

EEE VF ISO FOSteX Loading from an audio CD You can load a desired song to the unit from an audio CD you created by recording on a CD-RW/CD-R disc. When a desired song is loaded, the unit automatically creates a new program on the current drive, and the song are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of the program. Loading data from an audio CD is operated via the “Load PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is the same way as loading backup data. <mportant note for copyright> You can also load a material from a commercially available audio CD in the same manner, however, never use a material for which a copyright is re- served for a commercial purpose. Any unauthorized use will constitute infringement of such copyright and will render the infringer li- able to an action at low. Please remember that data included in a commercial audio CD (CD-DA) with copy protection being turned on cannot be loaded into VF160EX. The following description is assumed that you have an audio CD created by the VF160EX (or a commercially available audio CD). <Note> Key operations of the VF160EX should be done after com- pleting access to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

1. After turning on the power of the VF160EX, load a

recorded audio CD disc to the CD-R/RW drive.

2. Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

3. Use the [J 0G] dial to select (highlight) the “Load PGM”

menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display changes to show the screen for selecting the source device of loading, on which "IDE" flashes. Re Mer + “Eave PEN Chain las List Chain Plas off

The display changes to show the screen for selecting the load mode, on which "CD-DA' flashes. FEU: + site des or HO Ke

disitat device. Be sure to abide ba the corarisht <Warning message> The warning message for copyright shown on the screen is as follows. Warning! You are responsible for use of this digital device. Be sure to abide by the copyright conditions of the source material. Press “Enter/Yes” key if you agree with the above. <Note> If you do not agree with the warning message con- tents, press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit loading. The display briefly shows “Set Disable” and “Can't Loading”, then returns to the mode select screen. If you agree with the warning message contents, go to the next step to continue the operation. <Hint> When loading data using the S/P DIF digital signal, the same message also appears after selecting the load device to “SP DIF” and pressing the [ENTER/YES] key. If you agree to the message contents, press the IENTER/YES] key. The display changes to show the screen for selecting the load type, on which "One' flashes. You can select a desired load type from among "One", "select" and "All". See the following table for details about each load type.

Load Fin _ÎÜE CO Sons Load Tire Select AIl #1 REU FFLD: + Hit YES or MO Kes You can selectone or more tracks to be loaded. Each selected track is individually loaded to a new program automatically created on the current drive. One You can select one or more tracks to be loaded. Allthe selected tracks are individually loaded to a new program automatically created on the current drive. Select Allthe tracks on an audio CD are loaded to a new program automatically created on the current drive.

• “A new program automatically created on the current drive"has the program number one higher than the current highest program number. Selectthe desired load type and press the [ENTER/YES] key. Depending on the selected load type, the display shows as below. «When selecting “One” or “Select”: The screen as shown below appears. The left column shows the track numbers (01, 02...) of the audio CD, while “NON” in the second column shows no program is selected. “W’ is shown when more than one track is recorded on the audio CD. It is not shown when only one track is recorded on the audio CD. If only one track is recorded on the audio CD, “W” is not shown. To select desired tracks to be loaded, go to step 8. Sel £& Fec+vEs ÿ +When selecting “AI”: All tracks on the audio CD are selected to be loaded, and the screen as shown below appears. In this screen example, the destination program newly created on the current drive is “POS”. Each track time is also shown. Sel £ Fectÿes <Note> When loading from a audio CD, no title is shown when selecting the track.

When selecting “AÏl”, you can start loading tracks to the current drive by pressing the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the [RECORD] key. You can delete an unnecessary track if you want. See <Hint> below about how to do it. <Hint> Before executing “AI!” track loading, you can delete an unnecessary track by the following procedure.

1) While the display shows the screen as above, use

the [J 0G] dial to highlight the desired track and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The destination program number of the selected track starts flashing. Use the [J 0G] dial to select “NON” and press the IENTER/YES] key. A track whose destination program number is set to “NON” is not loaded.

Use the [J 0G] dial to select (highlight) a desired track to be loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The load destination program number of the selected track is shown as a flashing display, as well as the track time. In the screen example below, track 1 (01) is selected. The total time is also shown above the track list. (The total time is summed up each time you select another track.) [ [a] a FE EE In this condition, you can choose the option between “Pxx” (program number) and “NON” using the [JOG] dial. To cancel the track selection, choose “NON” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. To set the track to be loaded, go to the next step. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. The selected track (“01”, in this example) is set, while the screen changes as below. ETUF R21 Sel & Rectres

10. Use the [} 0G] dial to select (highlight) another desired

track to be loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key. In the example below, track 2 (02) is selected (of course, you can select whichever track you want). Depending on the load type (“One” or “Select”) selected in step 7) above, the screen shown is slightly different. When you set the load type to “One”, the load destination program number for the secondly selected track is one higher than that for the firstly selected track. That is, the load destination program number is counted up each time you select a track.

On the contrary, when you set the load type to “Select”, the load destination program number for the secondiy selected track is same as the firstly selected track. That is, all selected tracks are loaded to the same program. 1L. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. As with the firstly selected track, the secondly selected track (“02”, in this example) is set.

12. Operate the same procedure as above for selecting other

13. When completing selecting all desired tracks, press the

IENTER/YES] key while holding down the [RECORD] key. The display shows “Data Loading!” while the remaining data amount (in MB) is counted down. You cannot cancel loading once it starts. Wait for a while until loading is complete. Loading more amount takes more time. When completing loading, “Load Completed!” is shown, while the audio CD is automatically ejected from the CD- R/RW drive. Load PGM IDE Data Loadins! EG133PGS #+ ME Load Comeleted! —EKIT- Hit YES or NO Kes 14.Press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit the setup mode. <Hint> If you are going to load tracks 1 and 3 in the example above, instead of tracks 1 and 2, track 3 will be loaded to program 06 (see the screen example below). ETES) 63:84 35 _HOÜM However, if you select track 2 after selecting tracks 1 and 3, the unit automatically reassigns track 2 to pro- gram 06 and track 3 to program 07 (see the screen example below).

EEE VF ISO FOSteX <int> To play back a desired loaded track on the current drive, carry out the following operation depending on the load type. To play back a track loaded with the type set to “One”:

1. Selectthe appropriate program to which the track

to be played back is loaded by following the procedure below. See “Selecting a program” on page 71 of the owner’s manual for details about how to select a program. 1-1. Press the [PGM SEL] key. 1-2. Use the [J 0G] dial to highlight the appropriate program. 1:3. Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

2. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback ofthe track.

+__To play backtracks loaded with the type setto “Select” or “All”:

1. Selectthe destination program by following the

same procedure as step 1 above.

Select a desired track in the program by pressing the [REWIND/PREV] or [F FWD/NEXT] keys while holding down the [SHIFT] key when the recorder is stopped or during playback. Because all the tracks loaded take part in the same program, you have to select a track within the program. The VF160EX automatically set an event at the beginning of each track loaded with the type set to “Select” or “AI/”, so pressing [REWIND/PREV] or [F FWD/NEXT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key locates to the beginning of the previous or next track, as with a typical CD player on the market (see “Event function” on page 36).

3. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback ofthe track.

To check events, press the [SCENE STORE/MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key while the recorder is stopped. The display shows the event map, allowing you to check the event positions (in the screen example below, the time base is set to “Bar/Beat/CIk”). EUENT MAP Eard EEE Ho EEE Fu 176 d° de SÉVÈRE 118 Mont 68 2251E06 2915 Hon bd S2SEAF 5449 Hon

Chapter 7 SETUP mode

The SETUP mode of the VF16OEX offers the “Changing the initial settings” menus, which configure the operating environment of the VF160EX, a “Check” menu that enables you to check the number of events for each track, and an “Execution” menu that executes certain operations, such as save and load and disk formatting. The “Changing the initial settings” menu include 21 parameters as shown in <Table-1> below. These parameters were set before the VF160EX was shipped from the factory and these values are called the “initial settings.” Modifying these settings allows you to change the operating environment of the VF160EX. The “Check” menu provides two parameters “Checking the number of events” as shown in <Table-2> - “Checking the number of events” and “Checking the current drive information.” Also, as shown in <Table-3>, the “Execution” menus include five items: Title Edit, Delete PGM, Load PGM, Save PGM, and Disk Format, which you can execute by selecting the corresponding SETUP menu. This chapter explains how to use the “Changing the initial settings” menus shown in <Table-1> and the “Check” menu shown in <Table-2>. For more information on the “Execution” menus, refer to the corresponding pages in the “Reference page” column in <Table-3>. <Table-1>“Changing the initial settings” menu Parameters Display Default setting Referpage | Community Seting a me signature Signature Set DOIBAR 474 13 © Setting a tempo Tempo Set O0IBAR 1,120 15 O Setting the metronome function Click > oi 136 Seting a preroïime Prerol Time Dos 137 Seting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out TK 137 Seting an MTC frame rate Frame Rae 25 frame 38 Seting an MTC offset value Mic Offset Oh 59m 575 00FO0SF ET] Seting the offsetmode OfsetMode ABS 139 Seting he slave mode Save Mode Of 139 Sting the slave iype Save Type Var 140 O Setting the record protect function Rec Protect Of 140 O Seting digial put Digital Analog TI e Setting digital output Digital Out SPDIF 142 e Seting BARJBEAT resolution mode JResoluion Of 142 e Sting he MIDI device ID number Device ID 00 13 e Setting the fader fx mode Fader Fix Of 145 Seting the fader recall mode FaderRecall Li 15 Sting the pair fader Pair Fader Set OF 145 O Seting the phantom power Phantom Power oi 147 e Setting the compressor channel Comp. Channel Of 148 > Modes applicable program by program. They can be saved/loaded. Modes applicable to all program. They cannot be saved/loaded. he above “Default setting” is the figure immediately after formatting the current drive. <Table-2>“Check” menu Checkitem Display Refer page Community Check ofthe event number on the track Number OfE vent 143 - Check ofthe current drive information Drive Information 144 - <Table-3>“Execution” menu Execution item Display Refer page Community Ediing a program tite Title Edit 7 - Deleting a program Delete 71 Saving song data to an extemal device Load PGM 106 - Loading song data from an extemal device | Save PGM 106 - Formatting an current drive disk Disk Fommat 23

EEE VFISOE< FOStEX oel the SE TUP mode Entering the SETUP is possible only when the VF160EX is in the Stop mode. L While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key on Notez the operating panel. At shipping from the plant or when power is switched on When the [SETUP] key is pressed, the recorder enters the again, the “Signature Set” menu will be reversed in white- SETUP mode first stage and change to the display for black. Otherwise, when exiting from the SETUP mode, the selecting the SETUP menu. The white black reversed title SETUP menu that was displayed last will be reversed in indicates the currently selected menu and the w (flash) black and white. indicates that other titles exist below. 2. ffthe desired menu is selected via the J OG] dial and the [ENTER/YES] key pressed, you can proceed to the actual Select Menu setup procedure. EmFO Se <mportant> Title Edit FOMOI + To exit from the SETUP mode or return to the previous èe ! d È5 FENSL level, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key). + When selecting the desired SETUP menu, the [HOLD/>], IREWIND] and [F FWD] keys can be used in addition to the J 06] dial. ature setting [“Signature S Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal programmable Tempo Map. Also in this setting, the BAR (-002BAR, 14, OOCLK) displayed at the head of the disk in the time base BAR/BEAT/CLK can be set within a range of “-O09BAR” - “-002BAR”. For example, you can specify 4/4 for the first and second measures, and 2/2 from the third measure.” Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map, which allows the VF160EX to manage a song using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metronome function. A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock & song position pointer are output to an external sequencer. New Registering ofTime Signature

• Available time signature : 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3. While in the previous step 2 display, select “Insert New 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, “DEL” n
• Maximum setting points : “64” Event” and press the [ENTE RIVES] key. + The setting is applicable song by song. The “Insert New Event” display section will change to the + The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data display for setting up a new bar and the “002” number + The setting is memorized even when the power is off. will flash + Make sure you choose the right program before setting this LS . | | . mode. At this point, the bar figure displayed will be the bar figure setup last +1 and the signature figure displayed will be

1. Select a program for which to set a time signature. same as the last setting (Example: In the initial state,

“002BAR 4/4 ,” will be shown.

2. In the menu selecting display, select “Signature Set” and

press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display will change to confirming the currently set signature. In the initial setting, the display will be as shown below to indicate that the bar offset is “-002BAR”, signature from the first bar is set to “4/4”, and nothing is set after the first bar. If the J 06] dial is rotated, items displayed can be alternately selected. “-002BAR Offset” to setup the bar offset figure, 4. Input the desired bar figure with the [J OG] dial and press “Insert New Event” to setup a new signature following the first the [ENTER/YES] key. bar, and “AII Clear” to clear all signature/tempo settings, can It will change to flashing of “4/49.” be selected.

5. Input the desired meter via the [J 0G] dial and press the

IENTER/YES] key. The input bar and signature figures will be set as shown in the following. This display is an example of setting the third bar to 3/4 beat. If the [J 06] dial is rotated, the editing point of bar or signature, like the figures shown below, can be input.

l'Ûlesr The following bar numbers and time signatures can be entered via the [6] dial. Bar You can enter are from“ 001” to“ 999” . Time 1/4,2/4,3/4,4/4,5/4,1/8,3/8,5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8 Signature | or“ DEL” DEL” is used to deleted time signature data. <Note> You cannot register the “O01BAR“ of “OO1BAR 4/43.” Note> Take this procedure wipes out the tempo ime signature setting. re becau: Clearing All Time Signature/Tempo Data Note> Be careful because this procedure wipes out the tempo setting as well as time signature setting.

6. Next, to register other bar and time signature, repeat

7. Upon completion of registering, press the [E XIT/NO] key

(or the [STOP] key) and exit from the SETUP mode. Correcting the Registered Time Signature L Under the previous “Confirmation display,” select bar/ time signatures to be changed and press the [ENTER/ YES]key.

2. Input the desired signature via the [J 0G] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key. The newly input signature will be setup. Time 1/4,2/4,3/4,4/4,5/4,1/8,3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8 Signature | or“ DEL" | DEL” is used to deleted time signature data.

3. Upon finishing, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key)

to exit from the SETUP mode. Deleting a Time Signature L Under the above “Confirmation display,” select bar/time signatures to be deleted and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected measure/signature setting will be deleted.

4. After deleting, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key)

to exit from the SETUP mode. 1 Underthe above “Confirmation display,” select“All Clear” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. A following display of “All Clear,” “SURE ?” will fl This indicates the standby mode for clearing all signature setting data and the tempo data. “HASEAR Offset SÉLEAR 444 GASEAR 3-4 42 Insert Heu E All Clear

. Press the [ENTER/YES] key. Except for the initial setting “O01BAR 4/4 J,” other time signature settings and the tempo setting will be cleared at the same time.

. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the SETUP mode. Changing the Bar Offset Figure L Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “-002BAR Offset” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The “-002” display will change to flashing.

2. Input the desired offset value with the [] 0G] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key. Offset value can be input in the “-2” through “-9” range.

3. After correction, press the [E XIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key)

to exit from the SETUP mode.

D N/ GS OE< FOSteX etting a tempo [“Tempo The “Tempo Map Set” menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time signature setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure. Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map, which is used by the VF1GOEX to manage the song using the BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, and enable the metronome function. Tempo settings as well as time signature settings are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer. Note> The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and thus not accurate. Therefore, although the tempo map be matched with a personal computer, they will gradually drift apart. In order to prevent this drift, the personal computer side can be set to either MIDI clock sync or, the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to “MIDI Clock” the figure reset to make it possible for the computer to read the accurate tempo, and the return it again to MTC sync. Initial Setting: OO1BAR 1st beat 120 bpm Bar to registe Available tempo: 30 — 250, DEL (delete) Maximum setting points:64 The setting is applicable song by song. The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data HO OR OR E €

this mode. L Select a program for which to set a tempo setting.

2. Under the menu selection display, select “Tempo Set”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The display will change, confirming the current tempo setting. At the initial setting, the display will be as shown below, indicating that tempo of the first beat for the 001 bar is 120 and subsequent tempo is not setup. “Insert New Event” should be selected at setup of a new tempo. When the [} 0G] dial is rotated, the currently displayed items can be selected alternately. New Registering ofTempo Follows to the time signature setting Beat to register: Follows to the time signature setting The setting is memorized even when the power is off. Make sure you choose the right program before setting L Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “Insert New Event” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The “Insert New Event” section will change to new tempo setup display and “002” will flash. The bar value thus displayed will be the last setup bar value +1 and tempo value will be identical with the last setting (Example: In the initial setup state, “O02BAR 1J J=120” will be displayed.

2. Input the desired bar with the [J 0G] dial and press the

IENTER/YES] key. The bar value that can be input is identical with the above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key is pressed, “beat value” will change to flashing. Input the desired beat with the [J 0G] dial and press the IENTER/YES] key. The meter value that can be input is identical with the above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key is pressed, “tempo value” will change to flashing. Input the desired tempo with the [J 0G] dial and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The tempo can be input within the range of 30 through

map value thus input will be set and return to the above mentioned “Confirmation display for tempo map.”

5. To register another tempo map, repeat steps 1 through

Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode. For a setup example, if it is attempted to setup the following tempo in the music that is set to “O01BAR 4/4 3“ and “O05BAR 3/4 “ by the previous “signature setup,” as seen in the music score below, the tempo map must be set as follows = CPPPPEE-SEPPIPPE Gad") 14 = Tempo =120 Tempo =90 3 T & jan ff 1 Tempo =60 Tempo =120 Tempo Map Time signature setting Tempo setting

Fostex VA ISOS< D Correction of the Registered Tempo Erasing of the Registered Tempo L Underthe above “Confirmation display,” selectthe tempo map which is to be changed and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The same as before, “tempo value” will flash.

2. Input the desired tempo with the [] 0G] dial and press

(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode. etting the Metronome function 1 Underthe above “Confirmation display,’ selectthe tempo map which is to be erased and press the [ENTER/YES] key. In the same way as before, tempo value will flash and "DEL" will be shown aside it. HALERR14 J= HBZEAR14 JR Insert Heu

2. Press the [F FWD] key and select "DEL," then press the

[ENTER/YES] key. The selected tempo map will be erased.

3. Upon completing registering, press the [E XIT/NO] key

{or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode. <Note> You cannot register the “OO1BAR 1 3 3=120.” “Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to determine whether or not the VF160EX outputs a metronome sound from track 16 during playback or recording. Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound. <Note> Metronome sound will be output from track 16. For this reason, when the metronome function is activated, a new sound source cannot be recorded on the track to which the metronome sound is to be output or sound recorded on this track cannot be played back. If the metronome function is not to be used, be sure to reset it to “Off.” Initial Setting : “Off” Available setting : “Off” or “On” The setting is applicable song by song. The setting can be saved or loaded as à part of the song data The setting is memorized even when the power is off. Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode, L ) L Select “Click” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set item (“Off” or “On”) will flash (“Off” will flash if in the initial state). TUP Select Mer Temps Set Title Edit PGMai Delete PEM FSni ClickJ Of + Preroll Time _Os

2. Select “On” or “Off” with the [J 0G] dial and press the

[ENTER/YES] key. The selected item will be setup. on Metronome sound will be output from track 16. Off(defaut) | Metronome sound will not be output.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

EEE VF ISO FOSteX g a preroll value [“Preroll Time”] The VF160EX features a Preroll function that enables you to locate a position a few seconds prior to a specified locate point. The “Setting a preroll value” menu enables you to set the preroll time (in seconds). The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to monitor the audio data from a point slightly before the locate point. (+ Initial setting: 4pp? <ec, à L Select “Preroll Time” in the menu selection display and nitial setting: 00” second + Setting range of preroll time: _“00”- “10” seconds in press the [ENTER/YES] key. one second steps The currently set preroll time will flash. “00” will flash

• You can set the value for each Program individually. in the initial setting.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. SETL
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the Select Meng power to the VF160EX. ) Temro Set F = Title Edit PME Prerol me (before the locate point) can Lelete PGM be setbetneen 00 and 10 seconds. Clickdg $ Preroll Time Flashing : 2. Input the desired preroll value with the [J OG] dial and À This pointis located ifthe current position is press the [E NTE R/YES] key. : : À _afterthe locate point. The VF160EX will be set to the Preroll time thus input. This point is located if the current position is before the!

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

locate point. À t t SETUP mode. This pointis actually located. Locate point (stored in the memory key). Note> The preroll function is active when locating using the [LOCATE] key or in the auto return function. It is not active when locating using the combination of the [SHIFT] + [PREV] keys or the [SHIFT] + [NEXT] keys, or locating ABS 0 or REC END. The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the VF160EX to an external MIDI device. The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC (MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device. If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as described previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the MTC offset mode as described later. ss Initial setting: “CLK" a 2. Select the desired MIDI sync signal with the [J 0G] dial + Option: “CLK” (clock & Song Position Pointer), and press the [ENTER/VES] key. “MTC” (MIDI time code), or “Off” (no output) CLK (Initial setting) | MIDI clock and song position

• You can set the parameters for each Program pointer will be output. individually.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the MTC MIDI time code will be output. song data.
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the off Any MIDI sync signal will not power to the VF160EX. be output.

L Select“Midi Sync Out” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set item will flash. “CLK” will flash in initial setting.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

Fostex VFISOS S g frame rate [“Frame Rate” The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT connector of the VF1G60EX to an external MIDI device. If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal to “MTC”, you need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device (or sequence software). [+ Initial setting: “25” (25 frames) + Setting range of frame rate: “24”, “25”, “29df”, “29nd”, “30df” or “30nd”

• You can set the value for each Program individually.

• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of thé song data.

• The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VFLG6OEX. N J L Select “Frame Rate” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set frame rate will flashes. “25” will flash in the initial setting. Select Menu Clickd Off Prergll Time dés idiSsancou Frame Fate L___Flashing MTC Üffset Se g an MTC offset value [“Mtc Offset

2. Select the desired frame rate value with the [] 0G] dial

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. It will be set to the selected frame rate.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

SETUP mode. <Note> There are no 29.97nd or 29.97df in the MTC standard. Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need to synchronize the VF160EX with NTSC video. The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to specify an offset time value - the difference between the time of MTC output from the VF160EX and the ABS 00m 00s OOf O0sf time. You need to specify this value if you have selected “MTC” for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu. With the initial setting of OOh 59m 57s OOf OOsf, for example, MTC of 59m 57s OOf OOsf is output at the ABS time 00m 00s OOf 00sf. You can also set an offset value from the 001bar 1beat OOcIk value (bar/beat) on the Tempo Map. Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode. L > + Initial setting: “OOh: 59m: 575: OOf: OOsF” + Setting range of offset time: OOh: Om: 00s: OOf: OOsf — 23h: 59m: 595: 29f: 99sf

• You can set the value for each Program individually.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the BÉHS MS SO Gr ÊËSF

Flashing FFUD: + song data.

• The settings are maintained after you turn off the Hi FF VES or HO Kes power to the VF1GOEX. U ) Note> 2. Move the edit point with the [F FWD] key/[RE WIND] key, input the desired offset with the [J 0G] dial, then press the [ENTER/YES] key. Offset value thus input will be set. Advancing or retarding the input figure is carried out automatically with reference to the currently set MTC frame rate figure. For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” (See the next section) and you wish to start the song from MTC's O1h 00m 005 O0f, you may wish to set a preroll of three seconds with an MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s OO.

1. Select“Mtc Offset Set” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key. It will change to the second level display of the “Mtc Offset” menu and the currently set offset value will be shown. 00h 59m OO0f OOsf will be displayed in the initial state and “s” will flash. Flashing indicates the editable point.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

EEE VF ISO FOSteX S Offset mode [“Offset Mode If you have selected “MTC” in the “Setting Offset mode” menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode. This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS OOh 00m 00s OOf or at 001bar 1beat O0cIk (bar/beat) of the Tempo Map. <Notes> e As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” and you wish to start the song from MTC's 1h 00m 00s O0f, you may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s OOf. If you select “BAR “ as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two measures is automatically set. Use O1h 00m 00s 00; do not set a preroll value. < If you set Offset mode to “BAR“ and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer, the tempo of the quencer may sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the VF160EX and the tempo of the software are slightly different even if both use the same tempo. Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the VF160EX correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo of the VF160EX on the sequence software. No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes the VF160EX via MIDI clock, instead of MTC.

(e Initial setting: “ABS” 2. Select the desired offset mode with the [J OG] dial and + Offset mode option: “ABS” or “Bar press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• You can set the mode for each Program individually. The selected offset mode will be set.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. “ABS” (initial setting) | The specified MTC offset time is
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the power output at ABS OOh 00m 00s OOf. to the VFI60EX. . “BAR J“ The specified MTC offset time is L Select“Offset Mode” in the menu selection display and output at 001bar 1beat OOcIk of the press the [ENTER/YES] key. Tempo Map. The currently set offset mode will flash. “ABS” will flash in the initial setting.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

ESC — SETUP mode. Select Menu MidiSsncQut CLE

This mode allows you to choose the VF1G0EX slave mode setting either On or Off. If you set the slave mode to “On”, the VF160EX will synchronize to the incoming MTC (MIDI Time Code) from master unit. It will also synchronize to a type of external sync signal which you have chosen with the section “Slave Type setting.” [Initial setting: “Off” à 2. Select “On” or “Off” with the [J 0G] dial and press the + Offset mode option: “On” or “Off” IENTER/YES] key.

• You can set the mode for each Program individually.
• The setings can be saved and loaded as part of the 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the SETUP mode. power to the VF160EX. Upon exit from the SETUP mode, the “SLV” (SLAVE) icon : 7 will flash. L Select“Slave Mode” in the menu selection display and This icon will change to constant lighting when VF160EX press the [ENTER/YES] key. is correctly synchronized with the external equipment. The currently set slave mode will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial setting. SETUF R11 Select Menu Frame Rate 25 HTC Üffset Set Üffset Mode Slave Mode - À Flashing Slaus Tyrs ati EX——hashing tDte AS là 183HS6NE AIDNBIIMISIE dé LA

Fostex VFISOS ng the Slave Type [“SlaveType”] If you have set Slave Mode to “On” in the previous section “Slave Mode Setting,” you can choose what type of external sync signal that the VF160EX synchronizes to. This mode allows you to choose the external sync signal type. (le Initial setting: “Var” 7} 2. Select the desired slave type with the [J 0G] and + Offset mode option: “Vari”, “Free”, “SPDIF” or “adat” press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• You can set the mode for each Program individually. It will be set to the selected slave type.

• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. After chase lock is achieved, the VFL60EX

• The settings are maintained after you turn off the enters the free run mode with reference power to the VF1GOEX. ) Free to the internal clock. = If Digital In is selected, the VF160EX runs Notes> | in sync with the clock derived from Digi- + You need to input MTC from an external device to the tal In. VF160EX with any Slave Type. — + The VFI60EX re-chase window is fixed to ten frames. That After chase lock is achieved, the VFLGOEX is, if an offset between the master device and slave device Vari runs in the vari pitch mode to keep sync exceeds ten frames, the VF160EX interprets that as out of {initial setting) | With the master. Note that if the Digital Sync, and tried to chase and lock to MTC sent from the In is selected, the VF1GOEX runs in the master device. This operation is called “re-chasing.” same manner as "Free". During the re-chase operation, audio output is muted. If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master device by less than ten frames, the slave machine continues running while recognizing the slippage. + When you set the Slave Type, the Vari Pitch function is automatically disabled. (The “VARI PITCH” indicator turns off.) After chase lock is achieved, if the VF160EX receives an S/PDIF digital sig- SPDIF nal from the master, it runs in sync with the S/PDIF clock. Note that, if Digital In is selected, the VF160EX runs in sync with the clock derived from Digital In. After chase lock is achieved, if the L Select “Slave Type” in the menu selection display and VFIGOEX receives an adat digital signal press the [ENTER/YES] key. . adat from the master, it runs in sync with the The currently set slave type will flash. “Var” will flash adat clock. Note that, if Digital In is se- in the initial setting. lected, the VFIGOEX runs in sync with the clock derived from Digital In. SETUR R12 Select Menu MTC Offset Set Offset Mode ES Slave Mode qi Slave Tips rec Protect

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

SETUP mode. À —Fiashing etting the Record Protect function [“! The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you to turn the Record Protection function On or Off. When this function in turned “On”, you cannot record, paste, or erase data. Use this function to protect your important data from being accidentally erased.

• Initial setting: “OfP” à 2. Select“On” or “Off” with the [J 0G] dial and then press « Offset mode option: “On” or “Off” the [ENTER/YES] key.
• You can set the mode for each Program individually. It will be set to the selected item (“On” or “Off”).
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. Selecting “Off” enables recording; you can record, paste,
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the and erase data. power to the VFLGOEX. Selecting “On” disables recording; and you cannot record, L Select “Rec Protect” in the menu selection display and ù paste, or erase data. then press the [ENTER/YES] key. The presently set item (On or Off) will flash. “Off” will 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the flash in the initial setting. . SETUP mode. Note> When recording is disabled (“On”) and you try to record, paste, or erase data, the VF160EX displays “Protected!” for a second, indicating that you cannot perform the

EEE VF ISO FOSteX In the [Setting digital input] menu, whether the signal assigned to tracks 1 through 16 are digital signals (adat digital signal/SP DIF digital signal) or analog signals, can be setup. By using this function, it becomes possible to digitally record from external digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT, adat, digital mixer, etc.). If “S/P DIF” is selected for input of digital, the S/P DIF signal (L, R) applied to DIGITAL/ DATA INPUT of VF160EX, it will be assigned to any two tracks, and if “adat” is selected, the adat signals will be assigned to tracks 1 through 8. Ifit is set to “Analog”, analog signals input to the mixer will be assigned to tracks 1 through 16. <Note> If set to “S/P DIF or adat, “DIGITAL” will be lit in the display when the DIGITAL/DATA INPUT is locked. Should “DIGITAL” blink, check the connecting cables between external equipment and recheck the setups of VF160EX and external equipment. + Initial setting: + Options: “Analog” “Analog”, “adat”, or “SPDIF” (L=1-16, R=1-16) You can set the mode for each Program individually. The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF160EX. N J Select“ l In” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The items currently set will be shown in reversed white and black (In the initial state, “Analog” will be reversed in white and black). 7 J0G Hit TES or NO Ken Select the desired “digital in” with the [J 0G] dial. Depending on the item selected, the following will be shown in the LCD.

Lai REZ 3da AvJOG_ #REU _FFUD+ Hit_YES or HO Ke When in the initial setup and selecting “SPDIF,” simultaneous with indicating that L of the S/P DIF digital signal is gned to track 1 and that R to track 2, “<REW F FWD->” will also be shown. Thi: indicating that any track can be selected for assigning to L/R. If the [REWIND] key or [F FWD] key is pressed, the blinking “L**” or “R**” will move. If the [J 0G] dial is rotated, numbers 1 through 16 can be input at the blinking point. When selecting “SPDIF,” because S/P DIF digital signals can be assigned to any two tracks within 1 through 16, simultaneous recording of S/P DIF digital signal + analog signal is possible by input of analog signals into the other tracks (Refer to “Chapter 5 Features Applications” for details).

4. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the

*AT SELECTION OF “adat” Analos REZ TTUG Hit TES or NO Ken At selection of “adat,” adat digital signals (1-8) only will be assigned to tracks 1-8 and analog signals can be input to tracks 9-16. As adat digital signals can be input to tracks 1-8 and analog signals into tracks 9-16 by using this feature, simultaneous recording of analog/digital 16 tracks can be realized. For details, refer to “Chapter 5 Features Applications.” Selectthe desired “digital in” and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The selected “digital in” will be setup. If you set the digital input to "SPDIF", and press the IENTER/YES] key you will see a copyright warning. You can read the entire message by rotating the [J 0G] dial. If you accept, press the [ENTER/YES] key again. digital deuice. Be sure to abide Es the corsrisht SETUP mode. When a correct digital signal (adat or S/P DIF) is input from the external digital equipment and then VF160EX is locked to the input signal, "ADAT" or "SPDIF" will be lit in the normal display as shown below. If this display blinks, it indicating that an incorrect digi- tal signal is input to the VFLGOEX. In such a case, check connections between any external equipment or the ex- ternal equipment digital out setting. Atsetting of“SPDIF' Atsetting of“ADAT” “het. VaSNSE NE AIDNSMIS dE LA

Fostex VFISOS< D In the “Setup of digital output” menu, the type of digital signal to be output to external digital equipment from the VF160EX DIGITAL/DATA OUT connector, can be setup. By using this feature, digital signals recorded in VF160 can be directly sent without conversion to external digital equipment (MD, DAT, adat, digital mixer). are ren, When outputting digital signals to external digital "epending on the selected item, LCD will be as follows. equipment, the external digital equipment sampling AT SELECTING OF “SPDIF” (initial set equenc) st be set identic: e p) frequency must be set identical to that of the VFI60EX. When this setting is selected, STEREO BUSS L, R signals [ a will be output as S/P DIF digital signals and should be ! Oo PE D or “adat” selected at digital mixdown to a digital master recorder.

• You can set the mode for each Program individually.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. AT SELECTING OF “adat”

• The settings are maintained after you turn off the At selecting of “adat,” signals from tracks 9-16 will be power to the VFLG6OEX. output as adat digital signals. L 7 If signals from tracks 1-8 are to be output as adat digital

1. Select “Digital Out” in the menu selection display and signals, it must be executed after exchanging between

press the [ENTER/YES] key. tracks 1-8 and 9-16 by using the track exchange function (The same applies at output of data in the additional The current setting will flash. “SPDIF” will flash in the track). initial setting.

3. Selectthe desired digital out and press the [ENTER/YES]

key. The selected digital out will be setup. Je Tuti cn 4. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the fautes th SETUP mode. etting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode [“Resolution”] The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off. The initial setting is “Off” When you turn this mode “On”, the CLK (clock) digits will be always round off to “00” and be stored in the memory key while the VF160EX is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, That is, beat-resolution is used. Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-resolution value of the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT points and other points in real-time. (Press the [STORE] key, then the corresponding memory key while playing the VF1GOEX.) Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation in beat-resolution. K 1 that h, tored the value f L Select “Resolution” in the menu selection display and or example, assume that you have stored the value for 001bar 1446 clk as the CLIPBOARD IN point, and the press the [ENTER/VES] key. value for 002bar 49 51 clk as the CLIPBOARD OUT point. These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT resolution mode is turned off. However, the mode is turned on, the following values will be stored instead. The following example has a time signature setting of 4/ The presently set item will be flash (On or Off). “off” will flash in the initial setup. Rec Protect

Disital 1 001 bar 1: 46 clk ->001 bar 1. 00 clk Diaital Out {A clk value of 46 will be rounded off.) dresolution Device 10 002 bar 4 : 51 clk->003 bar 1. 00 clk {A clk value of 51 will be rounded up.)

2. Select “On” or “Off” with the [J 0G] dial and press the

ENTER/YES] key. {+ Initial setting: “Or” \ { INESIkey. + Options: “On” or “Off” P

• You can set the mode for each Program individually. 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the SETUP mode. song data.

• The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VFLG6OEX.

EN VFISOEX FOStEX etting the MIDI device number The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you to set the VF160EX device ID number required to control the VF160EX from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine Control). The transmit device ID links to this setting. You can set the device ID from 00 to 99. However, if the device ID number of the message the VF160EX receives is [7F], the VF1GOEX will recognizes it to perform the corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID setting. r ù + Initial setting: “00” 2. Select desired device number with the [J OG] dial and ! 400” “99” press the [ENTER/YES] key.

• t the mode for each Program individually.

• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from the song dat
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF1G6OEX. SETUP mode. L Select “Device ID” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The sently devis umber will be flash. “00” will flash in the initial setup. Select Menu Disital In An 5

Disital Out Era F JResolution Device 10 Humber_0f Even Checking the number of track events [“Number Of Even The “Checking the number of track events” menu enables you to check the number of events on each track. Each track (including Additional tracks) of VF160EX Programs consists of consecutive audio files (and “zero” files). The number of events represents the total number of audio files and O files. Each track can contain up to 512 events. If you are editing a song of typical length (about six minutes), repeated editing operation does not usually exceed this maximum number. (Exceeding this limit is called “event number overflow.”) Even a 20-minute song will not cause event number overflow. This is because the recorder system always optimizes the data structure by keeping the number of events low. However, if a recording on a track is scattered in different areas of the disk, or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits, you should be wary of “event number overflow.” To avoid this problem, use the “Checking the number of track events” menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing. L Select“Number of Event” in the menu a selection display 2. Use the [J 0G] dial to select another (01-24) to check the and press the [ENTER/YES] key. number of events on the corresponding track. It will change to the "Event" second level and the event number currently in each track will be displayed (The 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exitfrom the w symbol indicates there is data below). *** is the event number. SETUP mode. Trackgs 4

FosteX VAFISOS< Format information of the current drive currently installed can be checked by using the “Drive Format Information” menu. Should any trouble occur in the VF160EX, providing the information obtained here to our nearest Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service. The following items will be displayed and can be confirmed. Manufacture / Model of the currentiy installed hard

4. Simultaneously recordable number of tracks

5. Number of bits at formatting

6. Sampling frequency at formatting

7. Present number of programs

8. Present number of free blocks

9. Audio file / maximum number of events and its

10. Specific capacity of the drive

1L. Remaining capacity of the drive

12. Present software version

1 Select“Drive Information” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. It will change to the "Drive Information" second level and the current drive information currently in use will be displayed (The y symbol indicates there is data below). TUF E Drive Informati

2. Asthe[] 0OG]dial is rotated, information will be displayed

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

SETUP mode. [“Fader Fix” Whether the fader manipulation should be reflected on the sound volume or not can be set. The setup content will be held even if the main power is switched off. <Caution> The “Fader Fix Mode” can be made to function when set in other (CH, MST or CH & MST) than “Off” of the next item on the “Fader Recall Mode”.

Initial setting: “Off” Options: “On” or “Off” You can set the value for each Program individually. The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF1GOEX. *+ee L ) L Select“Fader Fix” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial setting. SETUF F Select Menu Saue PGl Chain Flas List

2. Select the desired item with the [] 0G] dial and press the

[ENTER/YES] key. The selected item will be set. On For all modes, manipulation of the Channel fader/Master fader will have not affect on the sound volume. Any accidental shifting of the fader position by vibration and misoperation can be prevented. Off (Initial setting) | Manipulation of the Channel fader/ Master fader will affect the sound volume.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

EEE VFISO= FOStEX Fader Recall Mode S g [“Fader Recall”] In the "Setup of the fader recall mode" menu, whether each channel input fader/master fader settings should be recalled or not at scene recall, can be setup. <Caution> When changing the setting from any option other than "Off" to "Off", or from "CH&MST" to "MST" or "CH", "Level Adjust! Sure?" appears in the display (this is because, after a scene is recalled, the physical fader positions may not match the levels). Press the [ENTER/YES] key and adjust levels. Note that there may be sudden level jumps depending on the fader positions. If you do not adjust levels, press the [EXIT/NO] key. [ initial : off à 2. Input the desired item with the [J 0G] dial and press the + Initial setting: “Off” + Options: “Off”, “CH”, “MST” or “CH & MST” [ENTERNESIKey. all be set

• You can set the value for each Program individually. e selected item Will be set.
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the of When scene is recalled, the fader song data. ol cott A edintalu cri
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the (Initial setting) Palling the scene Dr be directly er to the VF160EX. ù (__POner to ne ) employed without recalling the setup figures of each channel fader L Select “Fader Recall” in the menu a selection display and and the master fader. press the [ENTER/YES] key. CH (Channel) When scene is recalled, setup figures The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial of each channel faders only will be setting. recalled and not recall the master fader setup figure. MST (Master) | When scene is recalled, the setup Select Manu F- figure of the master fader only is Save PGh recalled and the channel fader setup Chain Plas List figures will not be recalled. Chain Plss 0 FF Fader Fix CH & MST When scene is recalled, each Faderkecall [—flashing channel faders and the master fader set up figures will both be recalled.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

FosteX VAFISOS< Pair Fader setting [Pair Fader Set] The “Pair Fader Set” menu sets whether or not you simultaneously control the adjacent odd and even chan- nels. Normally, each channel fader on the VF160EX acts independently. By setting "Pair Fader Set" to "On", you can pair faders of two adjacent channels, allowing the odd channel fader to control the partner (even) channel's level. This function is useful for stereo source, etc. You can also control "Pair Fader channels" simultaneously during channel parameter editing, etc. See <Hint!> below. f ù x ° Initial setting: "Off" for all pair channels (Hintst>

• Options: con oi for each pair For paired fader channels, besides fader control, # You can set the value for each Program individually. the following functions are controlled simulta-
• The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the neously. song data. :
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the * Effect send level adjustment power to the VF1GOEX. By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for [R J paired channels, the icons for both channels start flash- ing, and you can control the effect send levels for both

1. Select“Pair Fader Set” in the menu selection display channels simultaneously using the [J 06] dial.

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. *Effect send pre/post setting The pair fader set status (on or off) list is shown, where By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for the channel 1 & 2 line is highlighted. In the initial paired channels, the icons for both channels start flash- condition, all paired channels are set to "Off. ing, and you can set pre or post for the effect sends of both channels simultaneously using the [J 06] dial. + Aux send level adjustment By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, the icons for both channels start flash- ing, and you can control the Aux send levels for both channels simultaneously using the [J 06] dial. Ch 914

• Aux send pre/post setting By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, the icons for both channels start flash-

2. Selectthe desired paired channels via the I 0G] dial, ing, and you can set pre or post for the Aux sends of

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. both channels simultaneously using the [J 0G] dial. The setting field ("On" or "Off" is shown) for the selected *EQ (HI/MID/LO) adjustment channels flashes. By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, the icons for both channels start flash-

3. Select "On" or "Off via the [J 0G] dial, and press the ing, and you can adjust EQ for both channels simulta-

[ENTER/YES] key. neously. jaune cpl and te is rauns 0 -Onf ors0LO gnignta sing 2 step : By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, you can select on or off of solo monitor

4. To set another pair, repeat steps 2 and 3. for both channels simultaneously.

5. After completing all settings, press the [EXIT/NO] key *On/off of channel mute

(or the [STOP] key) to exitthe SETUP mode. By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, you can select on or off of mute for dote both channels simultaneou If you control the even channel fader which is paired, + Setting of INPUT (TRACK/INPUT) SEL (channels 9 the following message appears. through 16 only) Controlling the paired even channel fader does not By pressing either of the [CH STATUSICH SEL] keys for affect the level. paired channels, you can select the input sources for both channels simultaneously. +Setting of REC source for BUSS recording By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels, you can select the REC sources for both channels simultaneously. +Setting of the built-in compressor By pressing either of the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] keys for paired channels (channels 13-14 or 15-16), you can set the compressor parameters for both channels simulta- neously.

ON/OFF of phantom power provided at INPUT 7 and 8 (XLR-3-31) can be setup. <CAUTION!> Do the following before using the phantom power: + When connecting a condenser microphone to MIC INPUT 7 and 8 (XLR-3-31 type) of the VF1G0EX, be sure this microphone requires phantom power (+48V). + Switch ON the phantom power after connecting the condenser microphone. + Always mute the VF1G60EX output when switching ON-OFF the phantom power and when connecting or disconnecting the microphone cable from the VF1G0EX. + Always switch OFF the phantom power when connecting a dynamic microphone to INPUT 7 and 8 (XLR-3-31 type). Otherwise, a malfunction could occur. Phantom power cannot be used with the following equipment + Unbalanced output microphones. ° High impedance microphones. + In a microphone where there is voltage leak between pin 2/pin 3 and pin 1 of the microphone cable canon connector. + Old model ribbon microphones of the ground center tap output type. <CAUTION!> Ifthe phantom power supply is switched ON, do not connect an unbalanced line dynamic type microphone to INPUT 7 or INPUT 8. Be extremely careful of this as this could damage the internal microphone amplifier of VF160EX. [+ Initial setting: “Off” à 2. Select the desired item with the [] OG] dial and press the + Options: “On” or “Off” IENTER/YES] key.

• You can set the value for each Program individually. The selected item will be set.
• The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data. Off (itial setting) | Phantom power will not be supplied.
• The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160EX. On Phantom power is supplied to INPUT s 7 and 8. The PHANTOM LED will be L Select“Phantom Power” in the menu selection display and lit. press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial 3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the setting. SETUP mode. ETUF À Fader Fix Off Eader _Recall Off

FosteX VAFISOS< Compressor Channel Setting [“Comp. Channel In the "Setup of the compressor channel" menu, the channel in which the VF160EX internal compressor function should be activated can be setup. The compressor can be made to function in channels 13-14 or 15-16. Regardless to this setting, the compressor can be applied at all times to the master channel. <Note> The VF160EX internal compressor can be made to func- tion only in the channel setup here and the master chan- nel. However, editing of EQ in channels other than the master channel, is not permissible. (e Imitialsetting “Off” + Options: “OP”, “13-14” or “15-16” You can set the mode for each program individually. The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data. Although the setup content will not be held at switch off of power, it can be saved as a scene memory. U J L Select“Comp. Channel” in the menu selection display and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial setting. Select Menu Fader Recsil Off Pair Fader Set PhantomPouer Come. Channel Disk Format

2. Select the desired comp. Channel with the [J OG] dial

and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The selected item will be set. <important!> EQ cannot be applied to the channel (Except the master channel) setup for the compressor. With the compressor channel setup, if the EQ editing mode is entered, this condition will be indicated by the [CH STATUS/CH SEL] key LED. The channel in which the LED (green) is blinking is an indication that EQ editing is possible in this channel and the channel in which the LED is not lit is an indication that EQ cannot be applied to this channel. If a channel that cannot be EQ editing had been selected, the "Can't Select!" message will blink to warn that the operation is ineffective. The schematic below is an example of channels 15-16 setup as the compressor channel. This is indicating that channels 15 and 16 are setup as the compressor channel off Compressor can be applied only in {initial setting) | the master channel. 13-14 The compressor can be applied to channels 13/14 and the master channel. 15-16 The compressor can be applied to channels 15/16 and the master channel.

3. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

EN VFISOE< FOStexX Trouble Shooti A breakdown? If you suspect so, please read the fpllowing explanations before requesting repairs. Troubles at Recording + Inputsignal not indicated by the level meter ? + When attempting to select a recording track for Level meter does not light up even though DIRECT recording, are there some tracks between 9- recording track is set and channel fader/master 16 that cannot be selected ? fader is raised to the "O" position.

Setthe recorder to input monitor. Press the [RECORD] key only. The key will blink in red and the READY track will be in the input monitor mode. The recorder output can be applied to each channel faders. The level meter is unable to function unless the READY track is changed to the input monitor mode. For details, read pages 32-33 and 45-46.

• Level does not increase even though the channel fader is raised ? Recording level will not increase although the READY track channel fader is raised to maximum (+6). | Could there be some channels set to “INPUT” at setup of [INPUT]I-[TRACK]? DIRECT recording is executed, basically, with all chan- nels in the “TRK” mode at setup of [INPUT]-[TRACK], as shown below. Should any one channel of 9-16 is set to “INPUT”, that channel cannot be set as a recording track at DIRECT recording. Sound adjusted by EQ cannot be recorded by DIRECT recording ? Adjust [TRIM] knob to a suitable level. The level cannot be raised for small input signals if the ETRIM] knob is positioned at "LINE" (full CCW). Rotate the [TRIM] knob to just before the sound distorts.

+ The monitor sound is not heard even though the inputlevel/stereo buss L,R levels are being indicated by the meter ? Although the READY track is set to input monitor, no sound is heard in the headphone although the meter is indicating the level. Raise the [PHONES] knob. No sound will be heard if the headphones adjuster is turned down. Also, if monitoring with an external moni- tor speaker, raise the [MON OUT] knob.

When DIRECT recording, EQ cannot be applied. Application of EQat recording is permissible only at BUSS recording. Although EQ can be applied to the input sig- nal at DIRECT recording, this is strictly listening to the monitor sound only and the original sound will be re- corded without alteration. However, when BUSS recording, EQ can be applied to each input signal and recorded. Effect sound cannot be recorded at BUSS recording ? Select source channel for the effect. When BUSS recording, in order to record while apply- ing effect to the source channel, effect 1 or effect 2 must be selected together with selecting the source channel as shown in the schematic below. In the example below, input H and effect 1 are selected for the source channel. For details, read page 45.

FOSteX VAISOS< EE + Even though effectis selected for the sourc channel, effect cannot be applied ?

Raise the effect send level. Initially, the effect send level of each channel will all be at"O". Select the channel for applying effect and raise the ef- fect send level with the [JOG] dial. For details, read page

+ Ping pong recording cannot be executed ?

Is the playback track for ping pong set to source channel. Press the [BUSS-SOURCE] key and set the track for ping pong to source channel. Then, press the [BUSS-RECTRK]key and set the ping pong objective track in the READY mode. In the example below, tracks 1-4 and 9-12 are selected for the source channel and their signals sent for ping pong into tracks 15 and 16.

+ Cannot record external digital signals ? ital In" in the SETUP mode to the digital signal (S/P DIF or adat) to be input. Read page 141 for details. + Cannot record analog signals ?

Could the track about to be recorded still be set for digital inputs. Analog signals cannot be recorded in a track set for digital input by "Digital In" in the SETUP mode. Reset the digital input to "Analog." + Atplayback of digital signals just recorded, sound pitch is not normal ? Record digital signals ofsampling frequency iden- tical to that of the VF160EX. The VF160EX sampling frequency is 44.1kHz/16 bit. In a sampling frequency other than 44.1kHz/16 bit, it will be recorded with the wrong pitch. Time count will also be incorrect. g trouble E + À warning message appears although it was only execution of copy-clip (or move-clip) ? Correctiy register the CLIPBOARD IN and OUT points. The relation between CLIPBOARD'IN point and OUT point is "IN point<OUT point". fit is registered in reverse relationship, copy-clip (or move-clip) cannot be executed. + When copy paste (ormove paste)is executed,the sound section located before head of the bar is missing?

Use the ALIGN SEL function. If the "ALIGN SEL" function is used at executing Copy paste (or move paste), the sound section located in front of the bar head can be included at pasting. Refer to page 74 for details.

09: PAUSE STOP 40: WRITE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List 41: MASKED WRITE Refer to MMC Response/information Field List 42:READ Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List 44: LOCATE LOCATE to Setting Data 46: SEARCH CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1-60 times) 47: SHUTTLE CUE/REVIEW (+- 1-60 times) AC: MOVE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List 4D: ADD Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List 4E: SUBTRACT Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List MMC Response/information Field List Command 01: SELECTED TIME CODE READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

Inquiry Message List IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7 IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 13, 04, *, *, **, *, F7 51 :Fostex ID 01, 00 ‘Device family code 13, 04 ‘Device family number VF160EX #,%*, #4, #* :Software version

• For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth. For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off. Then polish with a dry cloth. Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior. Recording/Reproducing Recording Medium Recording Format Save/Load Format Sampling Frequency Quantization A/D Converter D/A Converter No. of Recording Track Vari Pitch Control Crossfade Recording/Reproducing Frequency Input/Output Input 1-6 Connector Input Impedance Standard Input Level Input 7 and 8 Connector Input Impedance Standard Input Level Phantom Power (XLR only) Output (Tip) Load Impedance Input Level INSERT Input/Output Connector Output (Tip) Load Impedance Input Level Input (Ring) Load Impedance Output Level MONITOR Output Connector Load Impedance Output Level HEADPHONE Connector Load Impedance Output Level AUX SEND 1 and 2 Connector Load Impedance

3.5 inch, hard disk (E-IDE type)

FDMS-3 (*) FDIO-1 (**) 44.,1KHz 16-bit linear (Non expanded) 20-bit 64 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma 24-bit 128 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma 16 real tracks + 8 additional tracks *16 tracks for simultaneous recording +/- 6% 10msec. 20Hz - 20KHz 56mm Phone jack (Unbalanced) 50kQ or more (Unbalanced) -50dBV - 2dBV 56mm Phone jack (Unbalanced) XLR-3-31 type (Balanced) 50kQ or more (Unbalanced), 10kQ or more (Balanced) -50dBV - 2dBV +48VDC (Setting of ON/OFF with SETUP mode) 10KkQ or more -10dBV 66mm TRS Phone jack 10KkQ or more -10dBV 10KkQ or more -10dBV 56mm Phone jack (Unbalanced) 10KkQ or more -10dBV 66mm TRS Phone jack

Connector General Dimensions Weight Power Supply Power Consumption Accessories

• Fostex Disk Management System-3 #* Fostex Data In Out-1 -10dBV RCA pin jack 10kQ or more -10dBV Optical (1) IEC 60958 (S/P DIF), (2) Alesis Proprietary Multi Channel Optical Interface (Either (1) or (2) is selected in the SETUP mode) Optical (1) IEC 60958 (S/P DIF), (2) Alesis Proprietary Multi Channel Optical Interface (Either (1) or (2) is selected in the SETUP mode) DIN 5 PIN #6mm Phone jack (An optional FOOT SW Model 8051 can be connected.) 402 (W) x 110 (H) x 370 (D) mm Approx. 6.1kg 120VAC 60Hz, 230V- 50/60Hz (AC inlet type) 22W Operation Manual Power Cable Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement.

“Adat” an the symbol are trademarks of Alesis Corporation.

Declaration of EC Directive This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance conceming the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance conceming electric equipment designed to be used within the specified voltage range. The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment The affect ofthe European Specification EN61000-6-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common immunity specification) on this equipment are as shown below.

• In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields, power frequency magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging environment, this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.